summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html98
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html142
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html206
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html143
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html137
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html4451
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html581
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html376
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html191
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html270
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbrun.1.html84
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html81
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html128
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html99
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html96
15 files changed, 7083 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b325c283ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>lmhosts</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>lmhosts</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ lmhosts - The Samba NetBIOS hosts file
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br>lmhosts is the <strong>Samba</strong> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This file is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br>lmhosts is the <strong>Samba</strong> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file. It
+is very similar to the <strong>/etc/hosts</strong> file format, except that the
+hostname component must correspond to the NetBIOS naming format.
+<p><br><a name="FILEFORMAT"></a>
+<h2>FILE FORMAT</h2>
+
+<p><br>It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name. The two
+fields on each line are separated from each other by white space. Any
+entry beginning with # is ignored. Each line in the lmhosts file
+contains the following information :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>IP Address</strong> - in dotted decimal format.
+<p><br><li > <strong>NetBIOS Name</strong> - This name format is a maximum fifteen
+character host name, with an optional trailing <code>'#'</code> character
+followed by the NetBIOS name type as two hexadecimal digits.
+<p><br>If the trailing <code>'#'</code> is omitted then the given IP address will be
+returned for all names that match the given name, whatever the NetBIOS
+name type in the lookup.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>An example follows :
+<p><br><pre>
+
+
+#
+# Sample Samba lmhosts file.
+#
+192.9.200.1 TESTPC
+192.9.200.20 NTSERVER#20
+192.9.200.21 SAMBASERVER
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>Contains three IP to NetBIOS name mappings. The first and third will
+be returned for any queries for the names <code>"TESTPC"</code> and
+<code>"SAMBASERVER"</code> respectively, whatever the type component of the
+NetBIOS name requested.
+<p><br>The second mapping will be returned only when the <code>"0x20"</code> name type
+for a name <code>"NTSERVER"</code> is queried. Any other name type will not be
+resolved.
+<p><br>The default location of the <strong>lmhosts</strong> file is in the same directory
+as the <a href="smb.conf.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>,
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusR"><strong>smbclient (1)</strong></a>,
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusR"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell (samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au). Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..db119b0e8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>make_smbcodepage</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>make_smbcodepage</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ make_codepage - Construct a codepage file for Samba
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>make_smbcodepage</strong> [<a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html#cord">c|d</a>] <a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html#codepage">codepage</a> <a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html#inputfile">inputfile</a> <a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html#outputfile">outputfile</a>
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>make_smbcodepage</strong> compiles or de-compiles codepage files for use
+with the internationalization features of Samba 2.0
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="cord"></a>
+<li><strong>c|d</strong> This tells make_smbcodepage if it is compiling (c) a text
+format code page file to binary, or (d) de-compiling a binary codepage
+file to text.
+<p><br><a name="codepage"></a>
+<li><strong>codepage</strong> This is the codepage we are processing (a number, eg. 850).
+<p><br><a name="inputfile"></a>
+<li><strong>inputfile</strong> This is the input file to process. In the 'c' case this
+will be a text codepage definition file such as the ones found in the
+Samba <em>source/codepages</em> directory. In the 'd' case this will be the
+binary format codepage definition file normally found in the
+<em>lib/codepages</em> directory in the Samba install directory path.
+<p><br><a name="outputfile"></a>
+<li><strong>outputfile</strong> This is the output file to produce.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="SambaCodepageFiles"></a>
+<h2>Samba Codepage Files</h2>
+
+<p><br>A text Samba codepage definition file is a description that tells
+Samba how to map from upper to lower case for characters greater than
+ascii 127 in the specified DOS code page. Note that for certain DOS
+codepages (437 for example) mapping from lower to upper case may be
+asynchronous. For example, in code page 437 lower case a acute maps to
+a plain upper case A when going from lower to upper case, but maps
+from plain upper case A to plain lower case a when lower casing a
+character.
+<p><br>A binary Samba codepage definition file is a binary representation of
+the same information, including a value that specifies what codepage
+this file is describing.
+<p><br>As Samba does not yet use UNICODE (current for Samba version 2.0) you
+must specify the client code page that your DOS and Windows clients
+are using if you wish to have case insensitivity done correctly for
+your particular language. The default codepage Samba uses is 850
+(Western European). Text codepage definition sample files are
+provided in the Samba distribution for codepages 437 (USA), 737
+(Greek), 850 (Western European) 852 (MS-DOS Latin 2), 861 (Icelandic),
+866 (Cyrillic), 932 (Kanji SJIS), 936 (Simplified Chinese), 949
+(Hangul) and 950 (Traditional Chinese). Users are encouraged to write
+text codepage definition files for their own code pages and donate
+them to <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. All codepage files in the
+Samba <em>source/codepages</em> directory are compiled and installed when a
+<em>'make install'</em> command is issued there.
+<p><br>The client codepage used by the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> server is
+configured using the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code
+page</strong></a> parameter in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="FILES"></a>
+<h2>FILES</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>codepage_def.&lt;codepage&gt;</strong>
+<p><br>These are the input (text) codepage files provided in the Samba
+<em>source/codepages</em> directory.
+<p><br>A text codepage definition file consists of multiple lines
+containing four fields. These fields are :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>lower</strong>: which is the (hex) lower case character mapped on this
+line.
+<p><br><li > <strong>upper</strong>: which is the (hex) upper case character that the lower
+case character will map to.
+<p><br><li > <strong>map upper to lower</strong> which is a boolean value (put either True
+or False here) which tells Samba if it is to map the given upper case
+character to the given lower case character when lower casing a
+filename.
+<p><br><li > <strong>map lower to upper</strong> which is a boolean value (put either True
+or False here) which tells Samba if it is to map the given lower case
+character to the given upper case character when upper casing a
+filename.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><strong>codepage.&lt;codepage&gt;</strong> These are the output (binary) codepage files
+produced and placed in the Samba destination <em>lib/codepage</em>
+directory.
+<p><br><a name="INSTALLATION"></a>
+<h2>INSTALLATION</h2>
+
+<p><br>The location of the server and its support files is a matter for
+individual system administrators. The following are thus suggestions
+only.
+<p><br>It is recommended that the <strong>make_smbcodepage</strong> program be installed
+under the <em>/usr/local/samba</em> hierarchy, in a directory readable by
+all, writeable only by root. The program itself should be executable
+by all. The program should NOT be setuid or setgid!
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf(5)</strong></a>, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e922434430
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>nmbd</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>nmbd</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ nmbd - NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS over IP
+naming services to clients
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>nmbd</strong> [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusD">-D</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minuso">-o</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusa">-a</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusH">-H lmhosts file</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusd">-d debuglevel</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusl">-l log file basename</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusn">-n primary NetBIOS name</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusp">-p port number</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minuss">-s configuration file</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minusi">-i NetBIOS scope</a>] [<a href="nmbd.8.html#minush">-h</a>]
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>nmbd</strong> is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP
+name service requests, like those produced by SMBD/CIFS clients such
+as Windows 95/98, Windows NT and LanManager clients. It also
+participates in the browsing protocols which make up the Windows
+"Network Neighborhood" view.
+<p><br>SMB/CIFS clients, when they start up, may wish to locate an SMB/CIFS
+server. That is, they wish to know what IP number a specified host is
+using.
+<p><br>Amongst other services, this program will listen for such requests,
+and if its own NetBIOS name is specified it will respond with the IP
+number of the host it is running on. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by
+default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, but this
+can be overriden with the <strong>-n</strong> option (see <em>OPTIONS</em> below). Thus
+nmbd will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s). Additional
+names for nmbd to respond on can be set via parameters in the
+<strong>smb.conf (5)</strong> configuration file.
+<p><br>nmbd can also be used as a WINS (Windows Internet Name Server)
+server. What this basically means is that it will act as a WINS
+database server, creating a database from name registration requests
+that it receives and replying to queries from clients for these names.
+<p><br>In addition, nmbd can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries
+from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a
+WIN server.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="minusD"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-D</strong></strong> If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate
+as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background,
+fielding requests on the appropriate port. By default, the server will
+NOT operate as a daemon. nmbd can also be operated from the inetd
+meta-daemon, although this is not recommended.
+<p><br><a name="minusa"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-a</strong></strong> If this parameter is specified, each new connection will
+append log messages to the log file. This is the default.
+<p><br><a name="minuso"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-o</strong></strong> If this parameter is specified, the log files will be
+overwritten when opened. By default, the log files will be appended
+to.
+<p><br><a name="minusH"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-H filename</strong></strong> NetBIOS lmhosts file.
+<p><br>The lmhosts file is a list of NetBIOS names to IP addresses that is
+loaded by the nmbd server and used via the name resolution mechanism
+<em>name resolve order</em> described in <strong>smbd.conf (5)</strong> to resolve any
+NetBIOS name queries needed by the server. Note that the contents of
+this file are <em>NOT</em> used by nmbd to answer any name queries, adding
+a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution from this host
+<em>ONLY</em>.
+<p><br>The default path to this file is compiled into Samba as part of the
+build process. Common defaults are <em>/usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts</em>,
+<em>/usr/samba/lib/lmhosts</em> or <em>/etc/lmhosts</em>. See the <strong>lmhosts
+(5)</strong> man page for details on the contents of this file.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d debuglevel</strong></strong> debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.
+<p><br>The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero.
+<p><br>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files
+about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors
+and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
+day to day running - it generates a small amount of information about
+operations carried out.
+<p><br>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and
+should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are
+designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
+<p><br>Note that specifying this parameter here will override the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"><strong>log
+level</strong></a> parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="minusl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-l logfile</strong></strong> The <strong>-l</strong> parameter specifies a path and base
+filename into which operational data from the running nmbd server will
+be logged. The actual log file name is generated by appending the
+extension ".nmb" to the specified base name. For example, if the name
+specified was "log" then the file log.nmb would contain the debugging
+data.
+<p><br>The default log file path is is compiled into Samba as part of the
+build process. Common defaults are <em>/usr/local/samba/var/log.nmb</em>,
+<em>/usr/samba/var/log.nmb</em> or <em>/var/log/log.nmb</em>.
+<p><br><a name="minusn"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-n primary NetBIOS name</strong></strong> This option allows you to override
+the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical to
+setting the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>NetBIOS name</strong></a> parameter
+in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file
+but will override the setting in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="minusp"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-p UDP port number</strong></strong> UDP port number is a positive integer value.
+<p><br>This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) that
+nmbd responds to name queries on. Don't use this option unless you are
+an expert, in which case you won't need help!
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s configuration file</strong></strong> The default configuration file name is
+set at build time, typically as <em>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</em>, but
+this may be changed when Samba is autoconfigured.
+<p><br>The file specified contains the configuration details required by the
+server. See <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> for more information.
+<p><br><a name="minusi"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-i scope</strong></strong> This specifies a NetBIOS scope that the server will use
+to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the
+use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes
+are <em>very</em> rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the
+system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you
+communicate with.
+<p><br><a name="minush"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-h</strong></strong> Prints the help information (usage) for nmbd.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="FILES"></a>
+<h2>FILES</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>/etc/inetd.conf</strong>
+<p><br>If the server is to be run by the inetd meta-daemon, this file must
+contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon.
+<p><br><strong>/etc/rc</strong>
+<p><br>(or whatever initialisation script your system uses).
+<p><br>If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to
+contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server.
+<p><br><strong>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</strong>
+<p><br>This is the default location of the <em>smb.conf</em> server configuration
+file. Other common places that systems install this file are
+<em>/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</em> and <em>/etc/smb.conf</em>.
+<p><br>When run as a <strong>WINS</strong> server (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>wins support</strong></a>
+parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> man page), <strong>nmbd</strong> will
+store the WINS database in the file <code>wins.dat</code> in the <code>var/locks</code> directory
+configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself.
+<p><br>If <strong>nmbd</strong> is acting as a <strong>browse master</strong> (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>local master</strong></a>
+parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> man page), <strong>nmbd</strong> will
+store the browsing database in the file <code>browse.dat</code> in the <code>var/locks</code> directory
+configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself.
+<p><br><a name="SIGNALS"></a>
+<h2>SIGNALS</h2>
+
+<p><br>To shut down an nmbd process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9)
+<em>NOT</em> be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name
+database in an inconsistant state. The correct way to terminate
+nmbd is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on
+its own.
+<p><br>nmbd will accept SIGHUP, which will cause it to dump out it's
+namelists into the file namelist.debug in the
+<em>/usr/local/samba/var/locks</em> directory (or the <em>var/locks</em>
+directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install
+itself). This will also cause nmbd to dump out it's server database in
+the log.nmb file. In addition, the the debug log level of nmbd may be raised
+by sending it a SIGUSR1 (<code>kill -USR1 &lt;nmbd-pid&gt;</code>) and lowered by sending it a
+SIGUSR2 (<code>kill -USR2 &lt;nmbd-pid&gt;</code>). This is to allow transient
+problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log
+level.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>inetd (8)</strong>, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a>, <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient (1)</strong></a>,
+<a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm (1)</strong></a>, <a href="testprns.1.html"><strong>testprns
+(1)</strong></a>, and the Internet RFC's <strong>rfc1001.txt</strong>,
+<strong>rfc1002.txt</strong>. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is
+available as a link from the Web page :
+<a href="http://samba.anu.edu.au/cifs/">http://samba.anu.edu.au/cifs/</a>.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell (samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au). Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full list of contributors
+and details on how to submit bug reports, comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..90120a9ec6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>nmblookup</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>nmblookup</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ nmblookup - NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>nmblookup</strong> [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusM">-M</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusR">-R</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusS">-S</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusr">-r</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusA">-A</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minush">-h</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusB">-B broadcast address</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusU">-U unicast address</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusd">-d debuglevel</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minuss">-s smb config file</a>] [<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusi">-i NetBIOS scope</a>] <a href="nmblookup.1.html#name">name</a>
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>nmblookup</strong> is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP
+addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries. The options
+allow the name queries to be directed at a particlar IP broadcast area
+or to a particular machine. All queries are done over UDP.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="minusM"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-M</strong></strong> Searches for a master browser. This is done by doing a
+broadcast lookup on the special name <code>__MSBROWSE__</code>.
+<p><br><a name="minusR"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-R</strong></strong> Set the recursion desired bit in the packet to do a
+recursive lookup. This is used when sending a name query to a machine
+running a WINS server and the user wishes to query the names in the
+WINS server. If this bit is unset the normal (broadcast responding)
+NetBIOS processing code on a machine is used instead. See rfc1001,
+rfc1002 for details.
+<p><br><a name="minusS"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-S</strong></strong> Once the name query has returned an IP address then do a
+node status query as well.
+<p><br><a name="minusr"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-r</strong></strong> Try and bind to UDP port 137 to send and receive UDP
+datagrams. The reason for this option is a bug in Windows 95 where it
+ignores the source port of the requesting packet and only replies to
+UDP port 137. Unfortunately, on most UNIX systems root privillage is
+needed to bind to this port, and in addition, if the
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> daemon is running on this machine it also
+binds to this port.
+<p><br><a name="minusA"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-A</strong></strong> Interpret &lt;name&gt; as an IP Address and do a node status
+query on this address.
+<p><br><a name="minush"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-h</strong></strong> Print a help (usage) message.
+<p><br><a name="minusB"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-B broadcast address</strong></strong> Send the query to the given broadcast
+address. Without this option the default behavior of nmblookup is to
+send the query to the broadcast address of the primary network
+interface as either auto-detected or defined in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a> parameter of the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="minusU"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-U unicast address</strong></strong> Do a unicast query to the specified
+address or host <code>"unicast address"</code>. This option (along with the
+<a href="nmblookup.1.html#minusR"><strong>-R</strong></a> option) is needed to query a WINS server.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d debuglevel</strong></strong> debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.
+<p><br>The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero.
+<p><br>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged about the
+activities of <strong>nmblookup</strong>. At level 0, only critical errors and
+serious warnings will be logged.
+<p><br>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and
+should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are
+designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
+<p><br>Note that specifying this parameter here will override the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"><strong>log
+level</strong></a> parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s smb.conf</strong></strong> This parameter specifies the pathname to the
+Samba configuration file, smb.conf. This file controls all aspects of
+the Samba setup on the machine and smbclient also needs to read this
+file.
+<p><br><a name="minusi"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-i scope</strong></strong> This specifies a NetBIOS scope that smbclient will use
+to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the
+use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes
+are <em>very</em> rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the
+system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you
+communicate with.
+<p><br><a name="name"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>name</strong></strong> This is the NetBIOS name being queried. Depending upon
+the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address. If a
+NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified by
+appending <code>#&lt;type&gt;</code> to the name.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="EXAMPLES"></a>
+<h2>EXAMPLES</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>nmblookup</strong> can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way .B
+nslookup is used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server,
+nmblookup must be called like this:
+<p><br><code>nmblookup -U server -R 'name'</code>
+<p><br>For example, running :
+<p><br><code>nmblookup -U samba.anu.edu.au -R IRIX#1B'</code>
+<p><br>would query the WINS server samba.anu.edu.au for the domain master
+browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a>, <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd (8)</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell (samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au). Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+<p><br></body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d47070909b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>Samba</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>Samba</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ Samba - A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<strong>Samba</strong>
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements
+the Server Message Block(commenly abbreviated as SMB) protocol for
+UNIX systems. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the
+Common Internet File System (CIFS), LanManager or NetBIOS protocol.
+<p><br><a name="COMPONENTS"></a>
+<h2>COMPONENTS</h2>
+
+<p><br>The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each component is
+described in a separate manual page. It is strongly recommended that
+you read the documentation that comes with Samba and the manual pages
+of those components that you use. If the manual pages aren't clear
+enough then please send a patch to <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong>
+(8)</a> daemon provides the file and print services to SMB
+clients, such as Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows for Workgroups or
+LanManager. The configuration file for this daemon is described in
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong>
+(8)</a> daemon provides NetBIOS nameserving and browsing
+support. The configuration file for this daemon is described in
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong>
+(1)</a> program implements a simple ftp-like
+client. This is useful for accessing SMB shares on other compatible
+servers (such as Windows NT), and can also be used to allow a UNIX box
+to print to a printer attached to any SMB server (such as a PC running
+Windows NT).
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm
+(1)</strong></a> utility allows you to test your <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> configuration file.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="testprns.1.html"><strong>testprns</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> the <a href="testprns.1.html"><strong>testprns
+(1)</strong></a> utility allows you to test the printers defined
+in your printcap file.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="smbstatus.1.html"><strong>smbstatus</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The <a href="smbstatus.1.html"><strong>smbstatus</strong>
+(1)</a> utility allows you to tell who is currently
+using the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a> server.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="nmblookup.1.html"><strong>nmblookup</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> the
+<a href="nmblookup.1.html"><strong>nmblookup (1)</strong></a> utility allows NetBIOS name
+queries to be made from the UNIX machine.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html"><strong>make_smbcodepage</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The
+<a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html"><strong>make_smbcodepage (1)</strong></a> utility allows
+you to create SMB code page definition files for your <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd
+(8)</strong></a> server.
+<p><br><li><strong><a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a></strong> <br> <br> The <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd
+(8)</strong></a> utility allows you to change SMB encrypted
+passwords on Samba and Windows NT(tm) servers.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="AVAILABILITY"></a>
+<h2>AVAILABILITY</h2>
+
+<p><br>The Samba software suite is licensed under the GNU Public License
+(GPL). A copy of that license should have come with the package in the
+file COPYING. You are encouraged to distribute copies of the Samba
+suite, but please keep obey the terms of this license.
+<p><br>The latest version of the Samba suite can be obtained via anonymous
+ftp from samba.anu.edu.au in the directory pub/samba/. It is
+also available on several mirror sites worldwide.
+<p><br>You may also find useful information about Samba on the newsgroup
+comp.protocols.smb and the Samba mailing list. Details on how to join
+the mailing list are given in the README file that comes with Samba.
+<p><br>If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Netscape or Mosaic) then
+you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues
+of the Samba mailing list, at
+<a href="http://samba.anu.edu.au/samba/">http://samba.anu.edu.au/samba/</a>.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="CONTRIBUTIONS"></a>
+<h2>CONTRIBUTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br>If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, then I suggest you
+join the Samba mailing list at <a href="mailto:samba@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. See the
+Web page at
+<a href="http://samba.anu.edu.au/listproc">http://samba.anu.edu.au/listproc</a>
+for details on how to do this.
+<p><br>If you have patches to submit or bugs to report then you may mail them
+directly to <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Note, however, that due to
+the enormous popularity of this package the Samba Team may take some
+time to repond to mail. We prefer patches in <em>diff -u</em> format.
+<p><br><a name="CREDITS"></a>
+<h2>CREDITS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but
+all deserve the thanks of all Samba users. To see a full list, look at
+<a href="ftp://samba.anu.edu.au/pub/samba/alpha/change-log">ftp://samba.anu.edu.au/pub/samba/alpha/change-log</a>
+for the pre-CVS changes and at
+<a href="ftp://samba.anu.edu.au/pub/samba/alpha/cvs.log">ftp://samba.anu.edu.au/pub/samba/alpha/cvs.log</a>
+for the contributors to Samba post-CVS. CVS is the Open Source source
+code control system used by the Samba Team to develop Samba. The
+project would have been unmanageable without it.
+<p><br>In addition, several commercial organisations now help fund the Samba
+Team with money and equipment. For details see the Samba Web pages at
+<a href="http://samba.anu.edu.au/samba/samba-thanks.html">http://samba.anu.edu.au/samba/samba-thanks.html</a>.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7f35b75969
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html
@@ -0,0 +1,4451 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smb.conf</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smb.conf</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smb.conf - The configuration file for the Samba suite
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smb.conf</strong> The <strong>smb.conf</strong> file is a configuration file for the
+Samba suite. <strong>smb.conf</strong> contains runtime configuration information
+for the Samba programs. The <strong>smb.conf</strong> file is designed to be
+configured and administered by the <a href="swat.8.html"><strong>swat (8)</strong></a>
+program. The complete description of the file format and possible
+parameters held within are here for reference purposes.
+<p><br><a name="FILEFORMAT"></a>
+<h2>FILE FORMAT</h2>
+
+<p><br>The file consists of sections and parameters. A section begins with
+the name of the section in square brackets and continues until the
+next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the form
+<p><br><code>'name = value'</code>
+<p><br>The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line
+represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.
+<p><br>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.
+<p><br>Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. Whitespace
+before or after the first equals sign is discarded. Leading, trailing
+and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is
+irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is
+discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value is retained
+verbatim.
+<p><br>Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') character is
+ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.
+<p><br>Any line ending in a <code>'\'</code> is "continued" on the next line in the
+customary UNIX fashion.
+<p><br>The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a
+string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no,
+0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is
+preserved in string values. Some items such as create modes are
+numeric.
+<p><br><a name="SECTIONDESCRIPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Each section in the configuration file (except for the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section) describes a shared resource (known
+as a <em>"share"</em>). The section name is the name of the shared resource
+and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes.
+<p><br>There are three special sections, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a>, which are
+described under <a href="smb.conf.5.html#SPECIALSECTIONS"><strong>'special sections'</strong></a>. The
+following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.
+<p><br>A share consists of a directory to which access is being given plus
+a description of the access rights which are granted to the user of
+the service. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable.
+<p><br>Sections are either filespace services (used by the client as an
+extension of their native file systems) or printable services (used by
+the client to access print services on the host running the server).
+<p><br>Sections may be designated <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>guest</strong></a> services, in which
+case no password is required to access them. A specified UNIX
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>guest account</strong></a> is used to define access
+privileges in this case.
+<p><br>Sections other than guest services will require a password to access
+them. The client provides the username. As older clients only provide
+passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to
+check against the password using the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user="</strong></a> option in
+the share definition. For modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and
+Windows NT, this should not be neccessary.
+<p><br>Note that the access rights granted by the server are masked by the
+access rights granted to the specified or guest UNIX user by the host
+system. The server does not grant more access than the host system
+grants.
+<p><br>The following sample section defines a file space share. The user has
+write access to the path <code>/home/bar</code>. The share is accessed via
+the share name "foo":
+<p><br><pre>
+
+
+ [foo]
+ path = /home/bar
+ writable = true
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>The following sample section defines a printable share. The share
+is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write access permitted
+is via calls to open, write to and close a spool file. The
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>'guest ok'</strong></a> parameter means access will be permitted
+as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ [aprinter]
+ path = /usr/spool/public
+ read only = true
+ printable = true
+ guest ok = true
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><a name="SPECIALSECTIONS"></a>
+<h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="global"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>The [global] section</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are
+defaults for sections which do not specifically define certain
+items. See the notes under <a href="smb.conf.5.html#PARAMETERS"><strong>'PARAMETERS'</strong></a> for more
+information.
+<p><br><a name="homes"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>The [homes] section</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If a section called <code>'homes'</code> is included in the configuration file,
+services connecting clients to their home directories can be created
+on the fly by the server.
+<p><br>When the connection request is made, the existing sections are
+scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, the
+requested section name is treated as a user name and looked up in the
+local password file. If the name exists and the correct password has
+been given, a share is created by cloning the [homes] section.
+<p><br>Some modifications are then made to the newly created share:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > The share name is changed from <code>'homes'</code> to the located
+username
+<p><br><li > If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home
+directory.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>If you decide to use a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path=</strong></a> line in your [homes]
+section then you may find it useful to use the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>
+macro. For example :
+<p><br><code>path=/data/pchome/%S</code>
+<p><br>would be useful if you have different home directories for your PCs
+than for UNIX access.
+<p><br>This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access
+to their home directories with a minimum of fuss.
+<p><br>A similar process occurs if the requested section name is <code>"homes"</code>,
+except that the share name is not changed to that of the requesting
+user. This method of using the [homes] section works well if different
+users share a client PC.
+<p><br>The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service
+section can specify, though some make more sense than others. The
+following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ [homes]
+ writable = yes
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes]
+section, all home directories will be visible to all clients
+<strong>without a password</strong>. In the very unlikely event that this is
+actually desirable, it would be wise to also specify <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>read only
+access</strong></a>.
+<p><br>Note that the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browseable"><strong>browseable</strong></a> flag for auto home
+directories will be inherited from the global browseable flag, not the
+[homes] browseable flag. This is useful as it means setting
+browseable=no in the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but
+make any auto home directories visible.
+<p><br><a name="printers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>The [printers] section</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This section works like <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a>, but for printers.
+<p><br>If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are
+able to connect to any printer specified in the local host's printcap
+file.
+<p><br>When a connection request is made, the existing sections are
+scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, but a
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> section exists, it is used as described
+above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a printer
+name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see if the
+requested section name is a valid printer share name. If a match is
+found, a new printer share is created by cloning the [printers]
+section.
+<p><br>A few modifications are then made to the newly created share:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > The share name is set to the located printer name
+<p><br><li > If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the
+located printer name
+<p><br><li > If the share does not permit guest access and no username was
+given, the username is set to the located printer name.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>Note that the [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify
+otherwise, the server will refuse to load the configuration file.
+<p><br>Typically the path specified would be that of a world-writable spool
+directory with the sticky bit set on it. A typical [printers] entry
+would look like this:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ [printers]
+ path = /usr/spool/public
+ writable = no
+ guest ok = yes
+ printable = yes
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate
+printer names as far as the server is concerned. If your printing
+subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have to set up a
+pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like
+this:
+<p><br><pre>
+ alias|alias|alias|alias...
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing
+subsystem. In the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section, specify the new
+file as your printcap. The server will then only recognise names
+found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain whatever
+aliases you like. The same technique could be used simply to limit
+access to a subset of your local printers.
+<p><br>An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry
+of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, components
+(if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols
+("|").
+<p><br>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are
+defined on the system you may be able to use <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>"printcap name =
+lpstat"</strong></a> to automatically obtain a list of
+printers. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>"printcap name"</strong></a> option for
+more detils.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="PARAMETERS"></a>
+<h2>PARAMETERS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.
+<p><br>Some parameters are specific to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section
+(eg., <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a>). Some parameters are usable in
+all sections (eg., <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>create mode</strong></a>). All others are
+permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following
+descriptions the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> and
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> sections will be considered normal.
+The letter <code>'G'</code> in parentheses indicates that a parameter is
+specific to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section. The letter <code>'S'</code>
+indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific
+section. Note that all <code>'S'</code> parameters can also be specified in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section - in which case they will define
+the default behaviour for all services.
+<p><br>Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not
+create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there
+are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the
+preferred synonym.
+<p><br><a name="VARIABLESUBSTITUTIONS"></a>
+<h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take
+substitutions. For example the option <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong><code>"path =
+/tmp/%u"</code></strong></a> would be interpreted as <code>"path = /tmp/john"</code> if
+the user connected with the username john.
+<p><br>These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but
+there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they might
+be relevant. These are:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="percentS"></a>
+<li > <strong>%S</strong> = the name of the current service, if any.
+<p><br><a name="percentP"></a>
+<li > <strong>%P</strong> = the root directory of the current service, if any.
+<p><br><a name="percentu"></a>
+<li > <strong>%u</strong> = user name of the current service, if any.
+<p><br><a name="percentg"></a>
+<li > <strong>%g</strong> = primary group name of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="percentU"></a>
+<li > <strong>%U</strong> = session user name (the user name that
+the client wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got).
+<p><br><a name="percentG"></a>
+<li > <strong>%G</strong> = primary group name of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentU"><strong>%U</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="percentH"></a>
+<li > <strong>%H</strong> = the home directory of the user given by <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="percentv"></a>
+<li > <strong>%v</strong> = the Samba version.
+<p><br><a name="percenth"></a>
+<li > <strong>%h</strong> = the internet hostname that Samba is running on.
+<p><br><a name="percentm"></a>
+<li > <strong>%m</strong> = the NetBIOS name of the client machine (very useful).
+<p><br><a name="percentL"></a>
+<li > <strong>%L</strong> = the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you to change your
+config based on what the client calls you. Your server can have a "dual
+personality".
+<p><br><a name="percentM"></a>
+<li > <strong>%M</strong> = the internet name of the client machine.
+<p><br><a name="percentN"></a>
+<li > <strong>%N</strong> = the name of your NIS home directory server. This is
+obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have not compiled Samba
+with the <strong>--with-automount</strong> option then this value will be the same
+as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentL"><strong>%L</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="percentp"></a>
+<li > <strong>%p</strong> = the path of the service's home directory, obtained from your NIS
+auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry is split up as "%N:%p".
+<p><br><a name="percentR"></a>
+<li > <strong>%R</strong> = the selected protocol level after protocol
+negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.
+<p><br><a name="percentd"></a>
+<li > <strong>%d</strong> = The process id of the current server process.
+<p><br><a name="percenta"></a>
+<li > <strong>%a</strong> = the architecture of the remote
+machine. Only some are recognised, and those may not be 100%
+reliable. It currently recognises Samba, WfWg, WinNT and
+Win95. Anything else will be known as "UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong
+then sending a level 3 log to <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>
+should allow it to be fixed.
+<p><br><a name="percentI"></a>
+<li > <strong>%I</strong> = The IP address of the client machine.
+<p><br><a name="percentT"></a>
+<li > <strong>%T</strong> = the current date and time.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>There are some quite creative things that can be done with these
+substitutions and other smb.conf options.
+<p><br><a name="NAMEMANGLING"></a>
+<h2>NAME MANGLING</h2>
+
+<p><br>Samba supports <em>"name mangling"</em> so that DOS and Windows clients can
+use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. It can also be set to
+adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.
+<p><br>There are several options that control the way mangling is performed,
+and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. For the
+defaults look at the output of the testparm program.
+<p><br>All of these options can be set separately for each service (or
+globally, of course).
+<p><br>The options are:
+<p><br><a name="manglecaseoption"></a>
+<strong>"mangle case = yes/no"</strong> controls if names that have characters that
+aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, if this is yes
+then a name like <code>"Mail"</code> would be mangled. Default <em>no</em>.
+<p><br><a name="casesensitiveoption"></a>
+<strong>"case sensitive = yes/no"</strong> controls whether filenames are case
+sensitive. If they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and
+match on passed names. Default <em>no</em>.
+<p><br><a name="defaultcaseoption"></a>
+<strong>"default case = upper/lower"</strong> controls what the default case is for new
+filenames. Default <em>lower</em>.
+<p><br><a name="preservecaseoption"></a>
+<strong>"preserve case = yes/no"</strong> controls if new files are created with the
+case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code>
+case. Default <em>Yes</em>.
+<p><br><a name="shortpreservecaseoption"></a>
+<p><br><strong>"short preserve case = yes/no"</strong> controls if new files which conform
+to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are
+created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code>
+case. This option can be use with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preservecaseoption"><strong>"preserve case =
+yes"</strong></a> to permit long filenames to retain their
+case, while short names are lowered. Default <em>Yes</em>.
+<p><br>By default, Samba 2.0 has the same semantics as a Windows NT
+server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.
+<p><br><a name="NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"></a>
+<h2>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</h2>
+
+<p><br>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a
+service. The server follows the following steps in determining if it
+will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the steps fail
+then the connection request is rejected. If one of the steps pass then
+the following steps are not checked.
+<p><br>If the service is marked <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only = yes"</strong></a> then
+steps 1 to 5 are skipped.
+<p><br><ol>
+<p><br><li> Step 1: If the client has passed a username/password pair and
+that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system's password
+programs then the connection is made as that username. Note that this
+includes the <code>\\server\service%username</code> method of passing a
+username.
+<p><br><li> Step 2: If the client has previously registered a username with
+the system and now supplies a correct password for that username then
+the connection is allowed.
+<p><br><li> Step 3: The client's netbios name and any previously used user
+names are checked against the supplied password, if they match then
+the connection is allowed as the corresponding user.
+<p><br><li> Step 4: If the client has previously validated a
+username/password pair with the server and the client has passed the
+validation token then that username is used. This step is skipped if
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#revalidate"><strong>"revalidate = yes"</strong></a> for this service.
+<p><br><li> Step 5: If a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user = "</strong></a> field is given in the
+smb.conf file for the service and the client has supplied a password,
+and that password matches (according to the UNIX system's password
+checking) with one of the usernames from the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user=</strong></a>
+field then the connection is made as the username in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user="</strong></a> line. If one of the username in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user=</strong></a> list begins with a <code>'@'</code> then that name
+expands to a list of names in the group of the same name.
+<p><br><li> Step 6: If the service is a guest service then a connection is
+made as the username given in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account
+="</strong></a> for the service, irrespective of the supplied
+password.
+<p><br></ol>
+<p><br><a name="COMPLETELISTOFGLOBALPARAMETERS"></a>
+<h2>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of each
+parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#announceas"><strong>announce as</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#announceversion"><strong>announce version</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#autoservices"><strong>auto services</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#bindinterfacesonly"><strong>bind interfaces only</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browselist"><strong>browse list</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#changenotifytimeout"><strong>change notify timeout</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#characterset"><strong>character set</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#codingsystem"><strong>coding system</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#configfile"><strong>config file</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deadtime"><strong>deadtime</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debugtimestamp"><strong>debug timestamp</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>debuglevel</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#default"><strong>default</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#defaultservice"><strong>default service</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dfreecommand"><strong>dfree command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dnsproxy"><strong>dns proxy</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainadmingroup"><strong>domain admin group</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainadminusers"><strong>domain admin users</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domaincontroller"><strong>domain controller</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domaingroups"><strong>domain groups</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainguestgroup"><strong>domain guest group</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainguestusers"><strong>domain guest users</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>domain logons</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainmaster"><strong>domain master</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>encrypt passwords</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#getwdcache"><strong>getwd cache</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homedirmap"><strong>homedir map</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsequiv"><strong>hosts equiv</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#keepalive"><strong>keepalive</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>kernel oplocks</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapfilter"><strong>ldap filter</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapport"><strong>ldap port</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaproot"><strong>ldap root</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaprootpasswd"><strong>ldap root passwd</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapserver"><strong>ldap server</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapsuffix"><strong>ldap suffix</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>lm announce</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>lm interval</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loadprinters"><strong>load printers</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>local master</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdir"><strong>lock dir</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdirectory"><strong>lock directory</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logfile"><strong>log file</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"><strong>log level</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logondrive"><strong>logon drive</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonhome"><strong>logon home</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonpath"><strong>logon path</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonscript"><strong>logon script</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpqcachetime"><strong>lpq cache time</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#machinepasswordtimeout"><strong>machine password timeout</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#mangledstack"><strong>mangled stack</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxdisksize"><strong>max disk size</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxlogsize"><strong>max log size</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxmux"><strong>max mux</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxopenfiles"><strong>max open files</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxpacket"><strong>max packet</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxttl"><strong>max ttl</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxwinsttl"><strong>max wins ttl</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxxmit"><strong>max xmit</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#messagecommand"><strong>message command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minwinsttl"><strong>min wins ttl</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>name resolve order</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>netbios aliases</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>netbios name</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nishomedir"><strong>nis homedir</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ntpipesupport"><strong>nt pipe support</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ntsmbsupport"><strong>nt smb support</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nullpasswords"><strong>null passwords</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#olelockingcompatibility"><strong>ole locking compatibility</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oslevel"><strong>os level</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#packetsize"><strong>packet size</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#panicaction"><strong>panic action</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>passwd chat</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchatdebug"><strong>passwd chat debug</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>passwd program</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordlevel"><strong>password level</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password server</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preferedmaster"><strong>prefered master</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preferredmaster"><strong>preferred master</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preload"><strong>preload</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcap"><strong>printcap</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>printcap name</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverfile"><strong>printer driver file</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#protocol"><strong>protocol</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readbmpx"><strong>read bmpx</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readprediction"><strong>read prediction</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readraw"><strong>read raw</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readsize"><strong>read size</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#remoteannounce"><strong>remote announce</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#remotebrowsesync"><strong>remote browse sync</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#root"><strong>root</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdir"><strong>root dir</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdirectory"><strong>root directory</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#serverstring"><strong>server string</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sharedmemsize"><strong>shared mem size</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#smbpasswdfile"><strong>smb passwd file</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#smbrun"><strong>smbrun</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketaddress"><strong>socket address</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"><strong>socket options</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ssl"><strong>ssl</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertDir"><strong>ssl CA certDir</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertFile"><strong>ssl CA certFile</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslciphers"><strong>ssl ciphers</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslclientcert"><strong>ssl client cert</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslclientkey"><strong>ssl client key</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslcompatibility"><strong>ssl compatibility</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhosts"><strong>ssl hosts</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhostsresign"><strong>ssl hosts resign</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslrequireclientcert"><strong>ssl require clientcert</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslrequireservercert"><strong>ssl require servercert</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslservercert"><strong>ssl server cert</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslserverkey"><strong>ssl server key</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslversion"><strong>ssl version</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#statcache"><strong>stat cache</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#statcachesize"><strong>stat cache size</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#stripdot"><strong>strip dot</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syslog"><strong>syslog</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syslogonly"><strong>syslog only</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#timeoffset"><strong>time offset</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#timeserver"><strong>time server</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#timestamplogs"><strong>timestamp logs</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>unix password sync</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixrealname"><strong>unix realname</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#updateencrypted"><strong>update encrypted</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#userhosts"><strong>use rhosts</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamelevel"><strong>username level</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamemap"><strong>username map</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>valid chars</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsproxy"><strong>wins proxy</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsserver"><strong>wins server</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>wins support</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeraw"><strong>write raw</strong></a>
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="COMPLETELISTOFSERVICEPARAMETERS"></a>
+<h2>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section of each
+parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#adminusers"><strong>admin users</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>allow hosts</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#alternatepermissions"><strong>alternate permissions</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#available"><strong>available</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#blockinglocks"><strong>blocking locks</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browsable"><strong>browsable</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browseable"><strong>browseable</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>case sensitive</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesignames"><strong>casesignames</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#comment"><strong>comment</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#copy"><strong>copy</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>create mask</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>create mode</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#defaultcase"><strong>default case</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deletereadonly"><strong>delete readonly</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deletevetofiles"><strong>delete veto files</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#denyhosts"><strong>deny hosts</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directory"><strong>directory</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>directory mask</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymode"><strong>directory mode</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dontdescend"><strong>dont descend</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dosfiletimeresolution"><strong>dos filetime resolution</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dosfiletimes"><strong>dos filetimes</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#exec"><strong>exec</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#fakedirectorycreatetimes"><strong>fake directory create times</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#fakeoplocks"><strong>fake oplocks</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#followsymlinks"><strong>follow symlinks</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>force create mode</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>force directory mode</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcegroup"><strong>force group</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forceuser"><strong>force user</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#fstype"><strong>fstype</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#group"><strong>group</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>guest account</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>guest ok</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>guest only</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidedotfiles"><strong>hide dot files</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidefiles"><strong>hide files</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>hosts allow</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsdeny"><strong>hosts deny</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#include"><strong>include</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>invalid users</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#locking"><strong>locking</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lppausecommand"><strong>lppause command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpqcommand"><strong>lpq command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpresumecommand"><strong>lpresume command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lprmcommand"><strong>lprm command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicoutput"><strong>magic output</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicscript"><strong>magic script</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglecase"><strong>mangle case</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#mangledmap"><strong>mangled map</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglednames"><strong>mangled names</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglingchar"><strong>mangling char</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maparchive"><strong>map archive</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maphidden"><strong>map hidden</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#mapsystem"><strong>map system</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>map to guest</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxconnections"><strong>max connections</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minprintspace"><strong>min print space</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#onlyguest"><strong>only guest</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#onlyuser"><strong>only user</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>postexec</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postscript"><strong>postscript</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>preexec</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preservecase"><strong>preserve case</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcommand"><strong>print command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printok"><strong>print ok</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printable"><strong>printable</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printer"><strong>printer</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriver"><strong>printer driver</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverlocation"><strong>printer driver location</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printername"><strong>printer name</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>printing</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#public"><strong>public</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#queuepausecommand"><strong>queuepause command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#queueresumecommand"><strong>queueresume command</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readlist"><strong>read list</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>read only</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#revalidate"><strong>revalidate</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootpostexec"><strong>root postexec</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootpreexec"><strong>root preexec</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#setdirectory"><strong>set directory</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sharemodes"><strong>share modes</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#shortpreservecase"><strong>short preserve case</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#status"><strong>status</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictlocking"><strong>strict locking</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictsync"><strong>strict sync</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syncalways"><strong>sync always</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#username"><strong>username</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#users"><strong>users</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validusers"><strong>valid users</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>veto files</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetooplockfiles"><strong>veto oplock files</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#volume"><strong>volume</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#widelinks"><strong>wide links</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writable"><strong>writable</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writelist"><strong>write list</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeok"><strong>write ok</strong></a>
+<p><br><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>writeable</strong></a>
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="EXPLANATIONOFEACHPARAMETER"></a>
+<h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="adminusers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>admin users (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges
+on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the
+super-user (root).
+<p><br>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list
+will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of
+file permissions.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong> <br>
+<code> no admin users</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong> <br>
+<code> admin users = jason</code>
+<p><br><a name="allowhosts"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>allow hosts (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>A synonym for this parameter is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>'hosts allow'</strong></a>
+<p><br>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which
+are permitted to access a service.
+<p><br>If specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section then it will
+apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service
+has a different setting.
+<p><br>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For example, you could
+restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with something
+like <code>"allow hosts = 150.203.5."</code>. The full syntax of the list is
+described in the man page <strong>hosts_access (5)</strong>. Note that this man
+page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will
+be given here also.
+<p><br><em>NOTE:</em> IF you wish to allow the <a href="smbpasswd.html.8"><strong>smbpasswd
+(8)</strong></a> program to be run by local users to change
+their Samba passwords using the local <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>
+daemon, then you <em>MUST</em> ensure that the localhost is listed in your
+<strong>allow hosts</strong> list, as <a href="smbpasswd.html.8"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a> runs
+in client-server mode and is seen by the local
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> process as just another client.
+<p><br>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup
+names if your system supports netgroups. The <em>EXCEPT</em> keyword can also
+be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide
+some help:
+<p><br><strong>Example 1</strong>: allow localhost and all IPs in 150.203.*.* except one
+<p><br><code> hosts allow = localhost, 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example 2</strong>: allow localhost and hosts that match the given network/netmask
+<p><br><code> hosts allow = localhost, 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example 3</strong>: allow a localhost plus a couple of hosts
+<p><br><code> hosts allow = localhost, lapland, arvidsjaur</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example 4</strong>: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet" or localhost, but
+deny access from one particular host
+<p><br><code> hosts allow = @foonet, localhost</code>
+<code> hosts deny = pirate</code>
+<p><br>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.
+<p><br>See <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm (1)</strong></a> for a way of testing your
+host access to see if it does what you expect.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> allow hosts = 150.203.5. localhost myhost.mynet.edu.au</code>
+<p><br><a name="alternatepermissions"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>alternate permissions (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a deprecated parameter. It no longer has any effect in Samba2.0.
+In previous versions of Samba it affected the way the DOS "read only"
+attribute was mapped for a file. In Samba2.0 a file is marked "read only"
+if the UNIX file does not have the 'w' bit set for the owner of the file,
+regardless if the owner of the file is the currently logged on user or not.
+<p><br><a name="announceas"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>announce as (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This specifies what type of server <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list. By default
+this is set to Windows NT. The valid options are : "NT", "Win95" or
+"WfW" meaining Windows NT, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups
+respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific
+need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this may prevent Samba
+servers from participating as browser servers correctly.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> announce as = NT</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example</strong>
+<code> announce as = Win95</code>
+<p><br><a name="announceversion"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>announce version (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use
+when announcing itself as a server. The default is 4.2. Do not change
+this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server
+to be a downlevel server.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> announce version = 4.2</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> announce version = 2.0</code>
+<p><br><a name="autoservices"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>auto services (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to
+the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services
+that would otherwise not be visible.
+<p><br>Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded
+then the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loadprinters"><strong>"load printers"</strong></a> option is easier.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> no auto services</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> auto services = fred lp colorlp</code>
+<p><br><a name="available"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>available (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter lets you <em>'turn off'</em> a service. If <code>'available = no'</code>,
+then <em>ALL</em> attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures
+are logged.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> available = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> available = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="bindinterfacesonly"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>bind interfaces only (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces
+on a machine will serve smb requests. If affects file service
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and name service <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a>
+in slightly different ways.
+<p><br>For name service it causes <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to bind to ports
+137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a>
+parameter. <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> also binds to the 'all
+addresses' interface (0.0.0.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes
+of reading broadcast messages. If this option is not set then
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will service name requests on all of these
+sockets. If <strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong> is set then
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will check the source address of any
+packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and discard any that don't
+match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> parameter list. As unicast packets
+are received on the other sockets it allows <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a>
+to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that arrive
+through any interfaces not listed in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>"interfaces"</strong></a> list. IP Source address spoofing
+does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used
+seriously as a security feature for <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a>.
+<p><br>For file service it causes <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to bind only to
+the interface list given in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a>
+parameter. This restricts the networks that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+will serve to packets coming in those interfaces. Note that you
+should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or
+other intermittant or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not
+cope with non-permanent interfaces.
+<p><br>In addition, to change a users SMB password, the
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> by default connects to the
+<em>"localhost" - 127.0.0.1</em> address as an SMB client to issue the
+password change request. If <strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong> is set then
+unless the network address <em>127.0.0.1</em> is added to the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> parameter list then
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> will fail to connect in it's
+default mode. <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> can be forced to
+use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr"><strong>"-r remote machine"</strong></a> parameter, with
+<strong>"remote machine"</strong> set to the IP name of the primary interface
+of the local host.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> bind interfaces only = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> bind interfaces only = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="blockinglocks"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>blocking locks (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter controls the behavior of <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> when
+given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region
+of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it.
+<p><br>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested cannot be
+immediately satisfied, Samba 2.0 will internally queue the lock
+request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the
+timeout period expires.
+<p><br>If this parameter is set to "False", then Samba 2.0 will behave
+as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock
+request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained.
+<p><br>This parameter can be set per share.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> blocking locks = True</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> blocking locks = False</code>
+<p><br><a name="browsable"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>broweable (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available
+shares in a net view and in the browse list.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> browsable = Yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> browsable = No</code>
+<p><br><a name="browselist"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>browse list(G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will serve a browse
+list to a client doing a NetServerEnum call. Normally set to true. You
+should never need to change this.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> browse list = Yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="browseable"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>browseable</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browsable"><strong>browsable</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="casesensitive"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>case sensitive (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>See the discussion in the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>NAME MANGLING</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="casesignames"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>casesignames (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case sensitive"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="changenotifytimeout"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>change notify timeout (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>One of the new NT SMB requests that Samba 2.0 supports is the
+"ChangeNotify" requests. This SMB allows a client to tell a server to
+<em>"watch"</em> a particular directory for any changes and only reply to
+the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of
+a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> daemon only performs such a scan on each
+requested directory once every <strong>change notify timeout</strong> seconds.
+<p><br><strong>change notify timeout</strong> is specified in units of seconds.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> change notify timeout = 60</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> change notify timeout = 300</code>
+<p><br>Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes.
+<p><br><a name="characterset"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>character set (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This allows a smbd to map incoming filenames from a DOS Code page (see
+the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> parameter) to several
+built in UNIX character sets. The built in code page translations are:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>ISO8859-1</strong> Western European UNIX character set. The parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code
+page 850 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to iso8859-1
+in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done
+correctly.
+<p><br><li > <strong>ISO8859-2</strong> Eastern European UNIX character set. The parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code
+page 852 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to ISO8859-2
+in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done
+correctly.
+<p><br><li > <strong>ISO8859-5</strong> Russian Cyrillic UNIX character set. The parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code
+page 866 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to ISO8859-2
+in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done
+correctly.
+<p><br><li > <strong>KOI8-R</strong> Alternate mapping for Russian Cyrillic UNIX
+character set. The parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code
+page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code page 866 if the
+<strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to KOI8-R in order for the
+conversion to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><em>BUG</em>. These MSDOS code page to UNIX character set mappings should
+be dynamic, like the loading of MS DOS code pages, not static.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a>. Normally this
+parameter is not set, meaning no filename translation is done.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> character set = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> character set = ISO8859-1</code>
+<p><br><a name="clientcodepage"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>client code page (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the DOS code page that the clients accessing
+Samba are using. To determine what code page a Windows or DOS client
+is using, open a DOS command prompt and type the command "chcp". This
+will output the code page. The default for USA MS-DOS, Windows 95, and
+Windows NT releases is code page 437. The default for western european
+releases of the above operating systems is code page 850.
+<p><br>This parameter tells <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> which of the
+<code>codepage.XXX</code> files to dynamically load on startup. These files,
+described more fully in the manual page <a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html"><strong>make_smbcodepage
+(1)</strong></a>, tell <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> how
+to map lower to upper case characters to provide the case insensitivity
+of filenames that Windows clients expect.
+<p><br>Samba currenly ships with the following code page files :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 437 - MS-DOS Latin US</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 737 - Windows '95 Greek</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 850 - MS-DOS Latin 1</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 852 - MS-DOS Latin 2</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 861 - MS-DOS Icelandic</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 866 - MS-DOS Cyrillic</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 932 - MS-DOS Japanese SJIS</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 936 - MS-DOS Simplified Chinese</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 949 - MS-DOS Korean Hangul</strong>
+<p><br><li > <strong>Code Page 950 - MS-DOS Traditional Chinese</strong>
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>Thus this parameter may have any of the values 437, 737, 850, 852,
+861, 932, 936, 949, or 950. If you don't find the codepage you need,
+read the comments in one of the other codepage files and the
+<a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html"><strong>make_smbcodepage (1)</strong></a> man page and
+write one. Please remember to donate it back to the Samba user
+community.
+<p><br>This parameter co-operates with the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid
+chars"</strong></a> parameter in determining what characters are
+valid in filenames and how capitalization is done. If you set both
+this parameter and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> parameter
+the <strong>"client code page"</strong> parameter <em>MUST</em> be set before the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> parameter in the <strong>smb.conf</strong>
+file. The <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> string will then augment
+the character settings in the "client code page" parameter.
+<p><br>If not set, <strong>"client code page"</strong> defaults to 850.
+<p><br>See also : <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a>
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> client code page = 850</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> client code page = 936</code>
+<p><br><a name="codingsystem"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>codingsystem (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is used to determine how incoming Shift-JIS Japanese
+characters are mapped from the incoming <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code
+page"</strong></a> used by the client, into file names in the
+UNIX filesystem. Only useful if <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code
+page"</strong></a> is set to 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS).
+<p><br>The options are :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>SJIS</strong> Shift-JIS. Does no conversion of the incoming filename.
+<p><br><li > <strong>JIS8, J8BB, J8BH, J8@B, J8@J, J8@H </strong> Convert from incoming
+Shift-JIS to eight bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out
+codes.
+<p><br><li > <strong>JIS7, J7BB, J7BH, J7@B, J7@J, J7@H </strong> Convert from incoming
+Shift-JIS to seven bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out
+codes.
+<p><br><li > <strong>JUNET, JUBB, JUBH, JU@B, JU@J, JU@H </strong> Convert from incoming
+Shift-JIS to JUNET code with different shift-in, shift out codes.
+<p><br><li > <strong>EUC</strong> Convert an incoming Shift-JIS character to EUC code.
+<p><br><li > <strong>HEX</strong> Convert an incoming Shift-JIS character to a 3 byte hex
+representation, ie. <code>:AB</code>.
+<p><br><li > <strong>CAP</strong> Convert an incoming Shift-JIS character to the 3 byte hex
+representation used by the Columbia Appletalk Program (CAP),
+ie. <code>:AB</code>. This is used for compatibility between Samba and CAP.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="comment"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>comment (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a
+queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via "net
+view" to list what shares are available.
+<p><br>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the machine
+name then see the server string command.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> No comment string</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> comment = Fred's Files</code>
+<p><br><a name="configfile"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>config file (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the
+default (usually <strong>smb.conf</strong>). There is a chicken and egg problem
+here as this option is set in the config file!
+<p><br>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when the
+parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new config
+file.
+<p><br>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very useful.
+<p><br>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded (allowing you
+to special case the config files of just a few clients).
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m</code>
+<p><br><a name="copy"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>copy (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter allows you to <em>'clone'</em> service entries. The specified
+service is simply duplicated under the current service's name. Any
+parameters specified in the current section will override those in the
+section being copied.
+<p><br>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and create similar
+services easily. Note that the service being copied must occur earlier
+in the configuration file than the service doing the copying.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> copy = otherservice</code>
+<p><br><a name="createmask"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>create mask (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>A synonym for this parameter is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>'create mode'</strong></a>.
+<p><br>When a file is created, the neccessary permissions are calculated
+according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the
+resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter.
+This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes
+of a file. Any bit <em>*not*</em> set here will be removed from the modes set
+on a file when it is created.
+<p><br>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other'
+write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.
+<p><br>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from
+this parameter with the value of the "force create mode" parameter
+which is set to 000 by default.
+<p><br>This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymode"><strong>'directory mode'</strong></a> for details.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>"force create mode"</strong></a> parameter
+for forcing particular mode bits to be set on created files. See also
+the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymode"><strong>"directory mode"</strong></a> parameter for masking
+mode bits on created directories.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> create mask = 0744</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> create mask = 0775</code>
+<p><br><a name="createmode"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>create mode (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>create mask</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="deadtime"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>deadtime (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number
+of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and
+it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of
+open files is zero.
+<p><br>This is useful to stop a server's resources being exhausted by a large
+number of inactive connections.
+<p><br>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a connection is
+broken so in most cases this parameter should be transparent to users.
+<p><br>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended
+for most systems.
+<p><br>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection should be
+performed.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> deadtime = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> deadtime = 15</code>
+<p><br><a name="debugtimestamp"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>debug timestamp (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Samba2.0 debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are
+running at a high <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>"debug level"</strong></a> these timestamps
+can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows them to be turned
+off.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> debug timestamp = Yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> debug timestamp = No</code>
+<p><br><a name="debuglevel"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>debug level (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows the debug level
+(logging level) to be specified in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file. This is to
+give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system.
+<p><br>The default will be the debug level specified on the command line
+or level zero if none was specified.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> debug level = 3</code>
+<p><br><a name="default"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>default (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>A synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#defaultservice"><strong>default service</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="defaultcase"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>default case (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a>. Also note
+the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#shortpreservecase"><strong>"short preserve case"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><a name="defaultservice"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>default service (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected
+to if the service actually requested cannot be found. Note that the
+square brackets are <em>NOT</em> given in the parameter value (see example
+below).
+<p><br>There is no default value for this parameter. If this parameter is not
+given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an
+error.
+<p><br>Typically the default service would be a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>guest ok</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>read-only</strong></a> service.
+<p><br>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that
+of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use
+macros like <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a> to make a wildcard service.
+<p><br>Note also that any <code>'_'</code> characters in the name of the service used
+in the default service will get mapped to a <code>'/'</code>. This allows for
+interesting things.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<pre>
+
+ default service = pub
+
+ [pub]
+ path = /%S
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><a name="deletereadonly"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>delete readonly (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. This is not
+normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.
+<p><br>This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where
+UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS
+semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> delete readonly = No</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> delete readonly = Yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="deletevetofiles"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>delete veto files (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory
+that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>'veto
+files'</strong></a> option). If this option is set to False (the
+default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or
+directories then the directory delete will fail. This is usually what
+you want.
+<p><br>If this option is set to True, then Samba will attempt to recursively
+delete any files and directories within the vetoed directory. This can
+be useful for integration with file serving systems such as <strong>NetAtalk</strong>,
+which create meta-files within directories you might normally veto
+DOS/Windows users from seeing (eg. <code>.AppleDouble</code>)
+<p><br>Setting <code>'delete veto files = True'</code> allows these directories to be
+transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long
+as the user has permissions to do so).
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>veto files</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> delete veto files = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> delete veto files = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="denyhosts"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>deny hosts (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The opposite of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>'allow hosts'</strong></a> - hosts listed
+here are <em>NOT</em> permitted access to services unless the specific
+services have their own lists to override this one. Where the lists
+conflict, the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>'allow'</strong></a> list takes precedence.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> deny hosts = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au</code>
+<p><br><a name="dfreecommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>dfree command (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The dfree command setting should only be used on systems where a
+problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has
+been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating
+systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry
+Ignore" at the end of each directory listing.
+<p><br>This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to
+calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external
+routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill
+this function.
+<p><br>The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a
+directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist
+of the string <code>"./"</code>. The script should return two integers in
+ascii. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the
+second should be the number of available blocks. An optional third
+return value can give the block size in bytes. The default blocksize
+is 1024 bytes.
+<p><br>Note: Your script should <em>NOT</em> be setuid or setgid and should be
+owned by (and writable only by) root!
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity
+and remaining space will be used.</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree</code>
+<p><br>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>Note that you may have to replace the command names with full
+path names on some systems.
+<p><br><a name="directory"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>directory (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="directorymask"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>directory mask (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS
+modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories.
+<p><br>When a directory is created, the neccessary permissions are calculated
+according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the
+resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter.
+This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes
+of a directory. Any bit <em>*not*</em> set here will be removed from the
+modes set on a directory when it is created.
+<p><br>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other'
+write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the
+directory to modify it.
+<p><br>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from
+this parameter with the value of the "force directory mode"
+parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by default (ie. no extra mode
+bits are added).
+<p><br>See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>"force directory mode"</strong></a> parameter
+to cause particular mode bits to always be set on created directories.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>"create mode"</strong></a> parameter for masking
+mode bits on created files.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> directory mask = 0755</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> directory mask = 0775</code>
+<p><br><a name="directorymode"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>directory mode (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>directory mask</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="dnsproxy"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>dns proxy (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Specifies that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> when acting as a WINS
+server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should
+treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup
+with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying
+client.
+<p><br>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters, so
+the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 15 characters,
+maximum.
+<p><br><a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> spawns a second copy of itself to do the
+DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action.
+<p><br>See also the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>wins support</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> dns proxy = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="domainadmingroup"></a>
+<strong>domain admin group (G)</strong>
+<p><br>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished
+Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release.
+To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for
+Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscibe to the
+mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by sending email to
+<a href="mailto:listproc@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>listproc@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>
+<p><br><a name="domainadminusers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain admin users (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished
+Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release.
+To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for
+Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscibe to the
+mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by sending email to
+<a href="mailto:listproc@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>listproc@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>
+<p><br><a name="domaincontroller"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain controller (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a <strong>DEPRECATED</strong> parameter. It is currently not used within
+the Samba source and should be removed from all current smb.conf
+files. It is left behind for compatibility reasons.
+<p><br><a name="domaingroups"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain groups (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished
+Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release.
+To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for
+Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscibe to the
+mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by sending email to
+<a href="mailto:listproc@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>listproc@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>
+<p><br><a name="domainguestgroup"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain guest group (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished
+Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release.
+To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for
+Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscibe to the
+mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by sending email to
+<a href="mailto:listproc@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>listproc@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>
+<p><br><a name="domainguestusers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain guest users (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished
+Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release.
+To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for
+Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscibe to the
+mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by sending email to
+<a href="mailto:listproc@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>listproc@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>
+<p><br><a name="domainlogons"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain logons (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If set to true, the Samba server will serve Windows 95/98 Domain
+logons for the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> it is in. For more
+details on setting up this feature see the file DOMAINS.txt in the
+Samba documentation directory <code>docs/</code> shipped with the source code.
+<p><br>Note that Win95/98 Domain logons are <em>NOT</em> the same as Windows
+NT Domain logons. NT Domain logons require a Primary Domain Controller
+(PDC) for the Domain. It is inteded that in a future release Samba
+will be able to provide this functionality for Windows NT clients
+also.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> domain logons = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="domainmaster"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>domain master (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Tell <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to enable WAN-wide browse list
+collation.Setting this option causes <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to
+claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a
+domain master browser for its given
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a>. Local master browsers in the same
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> on broadcast-isolated subnets will give
+this <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> their local browse lists, and then
+ask <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> for a complete copy of the browse list
+for the whole wide area network. Browser clients will then contact
+their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse
+list, instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet.
+<p><br>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to
+claim this <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> specific special NetBIOS
+name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> by default (ie. there is no way to
+prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This means that
+if this parameter is set and <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> claims the
+special name for a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> before a Windows NT
+PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely
+and may fail.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> domain master = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="dontdescend"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>dont descend (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>There are certain directories on some systems (eg., the <code>/proc</code> tree
+under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are
+infinitely deep (recursive). This parameter allows you to specify a
+comma-delimited list of directories that the server should always show
+as empty.
+<p><br>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the "dont
+descend" entries. For example you may need <code>"./proc"</code> instead of
+just <code>"/proc"</code>. Experimentation is the best policy :-)
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none (i.e., all directories are OK to descend)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> dont descend = /proc,/dev</code>
+<p><br><a name="dosfiletimeresolution"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>dos filetime resolution (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granulatity on
+time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter for a share
+causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second
+boundary when a query call that requires one second resolution is made
+to <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>.
+<p><br>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++
+when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a share,
+Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a file
+has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a
+one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As
+the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a
+timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not
+match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting
+this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is
+happy.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> dos filetime resolution = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> dos filetime resolution = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="dosfiletimes"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>dos filetimes (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change
+the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file
+or root may change the timestamp. By default, Samba runs with POSIX
+semantics and refuses to change the timestamp on a file if the user
+smbd is acting on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option
+to True allows DOS semantics and smbd will change the file timstamp as
+DOS requires.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> dos filetimes = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> dos filetimes = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="encryptpasswords"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>encrypt passwords (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated
+with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and above and also
+Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a
+registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in Samba see the
+file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation directory <code>docs/</code>
+shipped with the source code.
+<p><br>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> must either have access to a local
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a> file (see the
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a> program for information on
+how to set up and maintain this file), or set the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security=</strong></a> parameter to either
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"server"</strong></a> or
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"domain"</strong></a> which causes
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to authenticate against another server.
+<p><br><a name="exec"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>exec (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>preexec</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="fakedirectorycreatetimes"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>fake directory create times (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files
+and directories. This is not the same as the ctime - status change
+time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of
+the various times Unix does keep. Setting this parameter for a share
+causes Samba to always report midnight 1-1-1980 as the create time for
+directories.
+<p><br>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++
+when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated makefiles have
+the object directory as a dependency for each object file, and a make
+rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE compares timestamps it
+uses the creation time when examining a directory. Thus the object
+directory will be created if it does not exist, but once it does exist
+it will always have an earlier timestamp than the object files it
+contains.
+<p><br>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time reported by
+Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or deleted in the
+directory. NMAKE therefore finds all object files in the object
+directory bar the last one built are out of date compared to the
+directory and rebuilds them. Enabling this option ensures directories
+always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as
+expected.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> fake directory create times = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> fake directory create times = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="fakeoplocks"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>fake oplocks (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to
+locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock
+(opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the
+only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file
+data. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close
+operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.
+<p><br>When you set <code>"fake oplocks = yes"</code> <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will
+always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the
+file.
+<p><br>It is generally much better to use the real <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a>
+support rather than this parameter.
+<p><br>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that you
+know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as
+physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see a big performance
+improvement on many operations. If you enable this option on shares
+where multiple clients may be accessing the files read-write at the
+same time you can get data corruption. Use this option carefully!
+<p><br>This option is disabled by default.
+<p><br><a name="followsymlinks"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>follow symlinks (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> from following symbolic links in a
+particular share. Setting this parameter to <em>"No"</em> prevents any file
+or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user
+will get an error). This option is very useful to stop users from
+adding a symbolic link to <code>/etc/pasword</code> in their home directory for
+instance. However it will slow filename lookups down slightly.
+<p><br>This option is enabled (ie. <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will follow
+symbolic links) by default.
+<p><br><a name="forcecreatemode"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>force create mode (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will
+<em>*always*</em> be set on a file created by Samba. This is done by
+bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being
+created. The default for this parameter is (in octel) 000. The modes
+in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file mode after the mask
+set in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> parameter is applied.
+<p><br>See also the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> for details
+on masking mode bits on created files.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> force create mode = 000</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> force create mode = 0755</code>
+<p><br>would force all created files to have read and execute permissions set
+for 'group' and 'other' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for
+the 'user'.
+<p><br><a name="forcedirectorymode"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>force directory mode (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will
+<em>*always*</em> be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by
+bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is
+being created. The default for this parameter is (in octel) 0000 which
+will not add any extra permission bits to a created directory. This
+operation is done after the mode mask in the parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>"directory mask"</strong></a> is applied.
+<p><br>See also the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>"directory mask"</strong></a> for
+details on masking mode bits on created directories.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> force directory mode = 000</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> force directory mode = 0755</code>
+<p><br>would force all created directories to have read and execute
+permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
+read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.
+<p><br><a name="forcegroup"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>force group (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default
+primary group for all users connecting to this service. This is useful
+for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will
+use the named group for their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning
+permissions for this group to the files and directories within this
+service the Samba administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these
+files.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> no forced group</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> force group = agroup</code>
+<p><br><a name="forceuser"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>force user (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default
+user for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for
+sharing files. You should also use it carefully as using it
+incorrectly can cause security problems.
+<p><br>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. Thus
+clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a valid
+password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed as the
+<code>"forced user"</code>, no matter what username the client connected as.
+<p><br>This can be very useful.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> no forced user</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> force user = auser</code>
+<p><br><a name="fstype"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>fstype (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that
+specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> when a client queries the filesystem type
+for a share. The default type is <strong>"NTFS"</strong> for compatibility with
+Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as "Samba" or
+"FAT" if required.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> fstype = NTFS</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> fstype = Samba</code>
+<p><br><a name="getwdcache"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>getwd cache (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a cacheing algorithm
+will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have
+a significant impact on performance, especially when the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#widelinks"><strong>widelinks</strong></a> parameter is set to False.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> getwd cache = No</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> getwd cache = Yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="group"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>group (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcegroup"><strong>"force group"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="guestaccount"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>guest account (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a username which will be used for access to services which are
+specified as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>'guest ok'</strong></a> (see below). Whatever
+privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to
+the guest service. Typically this user will exist in the password
+file, but will not have a valid login. The user account <strong>"ftp"</strong> is
+often a good choice for this parameter. If a username is specified in
+a given service, the specified username overrides this one.
+<p><br>One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to
+print. Use another account in this case. You should test this by
+trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the <code>"su -"</code>
+command) and trying to print using the system print command such as
+<strong>lpr (1)</strong> or <strong>lp (1)</strong>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> specified at compile time, usually "nobody"</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> guest account = ftp</code>
+<p><br><a name="guestok"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>guest ok (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If this parameter is <em>'yes'</em> for a service, then no password is
+required to connect to the service. Privileges will be those of the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>guest account</strong></a>.
+<p><br>See the section below on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> for more
+information about this option.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> guest ok = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> guest ok = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="guestonly"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>guest only (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If this parameter is <em>'yes'</em> for a service, then only guest
+connections to the service are permitted. This parameter will have no
+affect if <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>"guest ok"</strong></a> or <a href="smb.conf.5.html#public"><strong>"public"</strong></a>
+is not set for the service.
+<p><br>See the section below on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> for more
+information about this option.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> guest only = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> guest only = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="hidedotfiles"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hide dot files (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with
+a dot appear as hidden files.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> hide dot files = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> hide dot files = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="hidefiles"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hide files(S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are
+accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or
+directories that match.
+<p><br>Each entry in the list must be separated by a <code>'/'</code>, which allows
+spaces to be included in the entry. <code>'*'</code> and <code>'?'</code> can be used
+to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards.
+<p><br>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must not include the
+unix directory separator <code>'/'</code>.
+<p><br>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable in hiding files.
+<p><br>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it
+will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they
+are scanned.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidedotfiles"><strong>"hide dot files"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>"veto
+files"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case sensitive"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default</strong>
+<pre>
+
+ No files or directories are hidden by this option (dot files are
+ hidden by default because of the "hide dot files" option).
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><strong>Example</strong>
+<code> hide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/</code>
+<p><br>The above example is based on files that the Macintosh SMB client
+(DAVE) available from <a href="www.thursby.com"><strong>Thursby</strong></a> creates for
+internal use, and also still hides all files beginning with a dot.
+<p><br><a name="homedirmap"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>homedir map (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nishomedir"><strong>"nis homedir"</strong></a> is true, and
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> is also acting as a Win95/98 <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon
+server</strong></a> then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP)
+map from which the server for the user's home directory should be
+extracted. At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is
+understood. The form of the map is:
+<p><br><code>username server:/some/file/system</code>
+<p><br>and the program will extract the servername from before the first
+<code>':'</code>. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes
+with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps.
+<p><br>NB: A working NIS is required on the system for this option to work.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nishomedir"><strong>"nis homedir"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>domain
+logons</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> homedir map = auto.home</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> homedir map = amd.homedir</code>
+<p><br><a name="hostsallow"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hosts allow (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>allow hosts</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="hostsdeny"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hosts deny (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#denyhosts"><strong>denyhosts</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="hostsequiv"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hosts equiv (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If this global parameter is a non-null string, it specifies the name
+of a file to read for the names of hosts and users who will be allowed
+access without specifying a password.
+<p><br>This is not be confused with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>allow hosts</strong></a> which
+is about hosts access to services and is more useful for guest
+services. <strong>hosts equiv</strong> may be useful for NT clients which will not
+supply passwords to samba.
+<p><br>NOTE: The use of <strong>hosts equiv</strong> can be a major security hole. This is
+because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is
+very easy to get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the
+<strong>hosts equiv</strong> option be only used if you really know what you are
+doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust your spouse and
+kids. And only if you <em>really</em> trust them :-).
+<p><br><strong>Default</strong>
+<code> No host equivalences</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example</strong>
+<code> hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</code>
+<p><br><a name="include"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>include (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file
+is included literally, as though typed in place.
+<p><br>It takes the standard substitutions, except <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentP"><strong>%P</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="interfaces"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>interfaces (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to setup multiple network interfaces, so that
+Samba can properly handle browsing on all interfaces.
+<p><br>The option takes a list of ip/netmask pairs. The netmask may either be
+a bitmask, or a bitlength.
+<p><br>For example, the following line:
+<p><br><code>interfaces = 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/24</code>
+<p><br>would configure two network interfaces with IP addresses 192.168.2.10
+and 192.168.3.10. The netmasks of both interfaces would be set to
+255.255.255.0.
+<p><br>You could produce an equivalent result by using:
+<p><br><code>interfaces = 192.168.2.10/255.255.255.0 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0</code>
+<p><br>if you prefer that format.
+<p><br>If this option is not set then Samba will attempt to find a primary
+interface, but won't attempt to configure more than one interface.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#bindinterfacesonly"><strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="invalidusers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>invalid users (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this
+service. This is really a <em>"paranoid"</em> check to absolutely ensure an
+improper setting does not breach your security.
+<p><br>A name starting with a <code>'@'</code> is interpreted as an NIS netgroup first
+(if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX group if the name
+was not found in the NIS netgroup database.
+<p><br>A name starting with <code>'+'</code> is interpreted only by looking in the
+UNIX group database. A name starting with <code>'&amp;'</code> is interpreted only
+by looking in the NIS netgroup database (this requires NIS to be
+working on your system). The characters <code>'+'</code> and <code>'&amp;'</code> may be
+used at the start of the name in either order so the value
+<code>"+&amp;group"</code> means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS
+netgroup database, and the value <code>"&amp;+group"</code> means check the NIS
+netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the same as
+the <code>'@'</code> prefix).
+<p><br>The current servicename is substituted for
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>. This is useful in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a>
+section.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validusers"><strong>"valid users"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> No invalid users</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> invalid users = root fred admin @wheel</code>
+<p><br><a name="keepalive"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>keepalive (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of
+seconds between <strong>'keepalive'</strong> packets. If this parameter is zero, no
+keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the
+server to tell whether a client is still present and responding.
+<p><br>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket being used
+has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"><strong>"socket
+options"</strong></a>). Basically you should only use this option
+if you strike difficulties.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> keep alive = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> keep alive = 60</code>
+<p><br><a name="kerneloplocks"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>kernel oplocks (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>For UNIXs that support kernel based <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a>
+(currently only IRIX but hopefully also Linux and FreeBSD soon) this
+parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off.
+<p><br>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a> to be
+broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation accesses a file
+that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> has oplocked. This allows complete
+data consistancy between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a
+<em>very</em> cool feature :-).
+<p><br>This parameter defaults to <em>"On"</em> on systems that have the support,
+and <em>"off"</em> on systems that don't. You should never need to touch
+this parameter.
+<p><br><a name="ldapfilter"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ldap filter (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a
+password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options
+are only available if your version of Samba was configured with
+the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option.
+<p><br>This parameter specifies an LDAP search filter used to search for a
+user name in the LDAP database. It must contain the string
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentU"><strong>%u</strong></a> which will be replaced with the user being
+searched for.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> empty string.</code>
+<p><br><a name="ldapport"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ldap port (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a
+password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options
+are only available if your version of Samba was configured with
+the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option.
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the TCP port number to use to contact
+the LDAP server on.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ldap port = 389.</code>
+<p><br><a name="ldaproot"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ldap root (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a
+password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options
+are only available if your version of Samba was configured with
+the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option.
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the entity to bind to the LDAP server
+as (essentially the LDAP username) in order to be able to perform
+queries and modifications on the LDAP database.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaprootpasswd"><strong>ldap root passwd</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> empty string (no user defined)</code>
+<p><br><a name="ldaprootpasswd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ldap root passwd (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a
+password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options
+are only available if your version of Samba was configured with
+the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option.
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the password for the entity to bind to the
+LDAP server as (the password for this LDAP username) in order to be
+able to perform queries and modifications on the LDAP database.
+<p><br><em>BUGS:</em> This parameter should <em>NOT</em> be a readable parameter
+in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file and will be removed once a correct
+storage place is found.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaproot"><strong>ldap root</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> empty string.</code>
+<p><br><a name="ldapserver"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ldap server (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a
+password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options
+are only available if your version of Samba was configured with
+the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option.
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the DNS name of the LDAP server to use
+for SMB/CIFS authentication purposes.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ldap server = localhost</code>
+<p><br><a name="ldapsuffix"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ldap suffix (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a
+password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options
+are only available if your version of Samba was configured with
+the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option.
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the <code>"dn"</code> or LDAP <em>"distinguished name"</em>
+that tells <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to start from when searching
+for an entry in the LDAP password database.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> empty string.</code>
+<p><br><a name="lmannounce"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lm announce (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter determines if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will produce
+Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by <strong>OS/2</strong> clients in order
+for them to see the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter
+can have three values, <code>"true"</code>, <code>"false"</code>, or <code>"auto"</code>. The
+default is <code>"auto"</code>. If set to <code>"false"</code> Samba will never produce
+these broadcasts. If set to <code>"true"</code> Samba will produce Lanman
+announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>"lm
+interval"</strong></a>. If set to <code>"auto"</code> Samba will not send Lanman
+announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them. If it hears
+such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them at a
+frequency set by the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>"lm interval"</strong></a>.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>"lm interval"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> lm announce = auto</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> lm announce = true</code>
+<p><br><a name="lminterval"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lm interval (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by
+<strong>OS/2</strong> clients (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>"lm announce"</strong></a>
+parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with
+which they will be made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman
+announcements will be made despite the setting of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>"lm
+announce"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>"lm announce"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> lm interval = 60</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> lm interval = 120</code>
+<p><br><a name="loadprinters"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>load printers (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap
+will be loaded for browsing by default. See the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>"printers"</strong></a> section for more details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> load printers = yes</code>
+<p><br>bg(Example:)
+<code> load printers = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="localmaster"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>local master (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to try and become a
+local master browser on a subnet. If set to False then
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will not attempt to become a local master
+browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By
+default this value is set to true. Setting this value to true doesn't
+mean that Samba will <em>become</em> the local master browser on a subnet,
+just that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will <em>participate</em> in
+elections for local master browser.
+<p><br>Setting this value to False will cause <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a>
+<em>never</em> to become a local master browser.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> local master = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="lockdir"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lock dir (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdirectory"><strong>"lock directory"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="lockdirectory"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lock directory (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed.
+The lock files are used to implement the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxconnections"><strong>"max
+connections"</strong></a> option.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> lock directory = /tmp/samba</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> lock directory = /usr/local/samba/var/locks</code>
+<p><br><a name="locking"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>locking (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server
+in response to lock requests from the client.
+<p><br>If <code>"locking = no"</code>, all lock and unlock requests will appear to
+succeed and all lock queries will indicate that the queried lock is
+clear.
+<p><br>If <code>"locking = yes"</code>, real locking will be performed by the server.
+<p><br>This option <em>may</em> be useful for read-only filesystems which <em>may</em>
+not need locking (such as cdrom drives), although setting this
+parameter of <code>"no"</code> is not really recommended even in this case.
+<p><br>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific
+service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. You should
+never need to set this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> locking = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> locking = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="logfile"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>log file (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This options allows you to override the name of the Samba log file
+(also known as the debug file).
+<p><br>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
+separate log files for each user or machine.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m</code>
+<p><br><a name="loglevel"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>log level (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>"debug level"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="logondrive"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>logon drive (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory
+will be connected (see <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonhome"><strong>"logon home"</strong></a>) and is only
+used by NT Workstations.
+<p><br>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> logon drive = h:</code>
+<p><br><a name="logonhome"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>logon home (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or
+NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to do
+<p><br><code>"NET USE H: /HOME"</code>
+<p><br>from a command prompt, for example.
+<p><br>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
+separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
+<p><br>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> logon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"</code>
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> logon home = "\\%N\%U"</code>
+<p><br><a name="logonpath"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>logon path (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the home directory where roaming profiles
+(USER.DAT / USER.MAN files for Windows 95/98) are stored.
+<p><br>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
+separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also specifies
+the directory from which the <code>"desktop"</code>, <code>"start menu"</code>,
+<code>"network neighborhood"</code> and <code>"programs"</code> folders, and their
+contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows 95/98 client.
+<p><br>The share and the path must be readable by the user for the
+preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows 95/98
+client. The share must be writeable when the logs in for the first
+time, in order that the Windows 95/98 client can create the user.dat
+and other directories.
+<p><br>Thereafter, the directories and any of contents can, if required, be
+made read-only. It is not adviseable that the USER.DAT file be made
+read-only - rename it to USER.MAN to achieve the desired effect (a
+<em>MAN</em>datory profile).
+<p><br>Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes]
+share, even though there is no user logged in. Therefore, it is vital
+that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes share
+(i.e setting this parameter to <code>\\%N\HOMES\profile_path</code> will cause
+problems).
+<p><br>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
+separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
+<p><br>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> logon path = \\%N\%U\profile</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\HOME_DIR\%U\PROFILE</code>
+<p><br><a name="logonscript"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>logon script (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or NT command file
+(.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully
+logs in. The file must contain the DOS style cr/lf line endings.
+Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended.
+<p><br>The script must be a relative path to the <code>[netlogon]</code> service. If
+the <code>[netlogon]</code> service specifies a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path</strong></a> of
+/usr/local/samba/netlogon, and logon script = STARTUP.BAT, then the
+file that will be downloaded is:
+<p><br><code>/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</code>
+<p><br>The contents of the batch file is entirely your choice. A suggested
+command would be to add <code>NET TIME \\SERVER /SET /YES</code>, to force every
+machine to synchronise clocks with the same time server. Another use
+would be to add <code>NET USE U: \\SERVER\UTILS</code> for commonly used
+utilities, or <code>NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</code> for example.
+<p><br>Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to
+the <code>[netlogon]</code> share, or to grant users write permission on the
+batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch
+files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be breached.
+<p><br>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
+separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
+<p><br>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> logon script = scripts\%U.bat</code>
+<p><br><a name="lppausecommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lppause command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host
+in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.
+<p><br>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
+and job number to pause the print job. One way of implementing this is
+by using job priorities, where jobs having a too low priority won't be
+sent to the printer.
+<p><br>If a <code>"%p"</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. A
+<code>"%j"</code> is replaced with the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>printing=hpux</strong></a>), if the <code>"-p%p"</code> option is added
+to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status,
+i.e. if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will
+have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it
+will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.
+<p><br>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
+lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+ Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the
+value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>SYSV</code>, in
+which case the default is :
+<p><br><code> lp -i %p-%j -H hold</code>
+<p><br>or if the value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>softq</code>,
+then the default is:
+<p><br><code> qstat -s -j%j -h</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example for HPUX:</strong>
+ lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0
+<p><br><a name="lpqcachetime"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lpq cache time (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the
+<strong>lpq</strong> command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for
+each variation of the <strong>lpq</strong> command used by the system, so if you
+use different <strong>lpq</strong> commands for different users then they won't
+share cache information.
+<p><br>The cache files are stored in <code>/tmp/lpq.xxxx</code> where xxxx is a hash of
+the <strong>lpq</strong> command in use.
+<p><br>The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a
+previous identical <strong>lpq</strong> command will be used if the cached data is
+less than 10 seconds old. A large value may be advisable if your
+<strong>lpq</strong> command is very slow.
+<p><br>A value of 0 will disable cacheing completely.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> lpq cache time = 10</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> lpq cache time = 30</code>
+<p><br><a name="lpqcommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lpq command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host
+in order to obtain <code>"lpq"</code>-style printer status information.
+<p><br>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
+as its only parameter and outputs printer status information.
+<p><br>Currently eight styles of printer status information are supported;
+BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX and SOFTQ. This covers most UNIX
+systems. You control which type is expected using the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing ="</strong></a> option.
+<p><br>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly send
+the connection number for the printer they are requesting status
+information about. To get around this, the server reports on the first
+printer service connected to by the client. This only happens if the
+connection number sent is invalid.
+<p><br>If a <code>%p</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. Otherwise
+it is placed at the end of the command.
+<p><br>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the <strong>lpq
+command</strong> as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> depends on the setting of printing =</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq %p</code>
+<p><br><a name="lpresumecommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lpresume command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host
+in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print
+job.
+<p><br>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
+and job number to resume the print job. See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lppausecommand"><strong>"lppause
+command"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br>If a <code>%p</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. A
+<code>%j</code> is replaced with the job number (an integer).
+<p><br>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the <strong>lpresume
+command</strong> as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<p><br>Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the
+value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>SYSV</code>, in
+which case the default is :
+<p><br><code> lp -i %p-%j -H resume</code>
+<p><br>or if the value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>softq</code>,
+then the default is:
+<p><br><code> qstat -s -j%j -r</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example for HPUX:</strong>
+<code> lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2</code>
+<p><br><a name="lprmcommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>lprm command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host
+in order to delete a print job.
+<p><br>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
+and job number, and deletes the print job.
+<p><br>If a <code>%p</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. A
+<code>%j</code> is replaced with the job number (an integer).
+<p><br>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
+<strong>lprm command</strong> as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> depends on the setting of "printing ="</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example 1:</strong>
+<code> lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example 2:</strong>
+<code> lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j</code>
+<p><br><a name="machinepasswordtimeout"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>machine password timeout (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If a Samba server is a member of an Windows NT Domain (see the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>) parameter) then
+periodically a running <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> process will try and
+change the <strong>MACHINE ACCOUNT PASWORD</strong> stored in the file called
+<code>&lt;Domain&gt;.&lt;Machine&gt;.mac</code> where <code>&lt;Domain&gt;</code> is the name of the
+Domain we are a member of and tt&lt;Machine&gt; is the primary
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>"NetBIOS name"</strong></a> of the machine
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> is running on. This parameter specifies how
+often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one
+week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member
+server.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a>, and the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>) parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> machine password timeout = 604800</code>
+<p><br><a name="magicoutput"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>magic output (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output
+created by a magic script (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicscript"><strong>"magic
+script"</strong></a> parameter below).
+<p><br>Warning: If two clients use the same <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicscript"><strong>"magic
+script"</strong></a> in the same directory the output file content
+is undefined.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> magic output = &lt;magic script name&gt;.out</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> magic output = myfile.txt</code>
+<p><br><a name="magicscript"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>magic script (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be
+executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a UNIX
+script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the
+connected user.
+<p><br>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion,
+permissions permitting.
+<p><br>If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file
+specified by the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicoutput"><strong>"magic output"</strong></a> parameter (see
+above).
+<p><br>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing
+carriage-return-linefeed instead of linefeed as the end-of-line
+marker. Magic scripts must be executable <em>"as is"</em> on the host,
+which for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS
+end.
+<p><br>Magic scripts are <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> and should <em>NOT</em> be relied upon.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> None. Magic scripts disabled.</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> magic script = user.csh</code>
+<p><br><a name="manglecase"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>mangle case (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="mangledmap"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>mangled map (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX file names which are
+not representable on Windows/DOS. The mangling of names is not always
+what is needed. In particular you may have documents with file
+extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX. For example, under UNIX
+it is common to use <code>".html"</code> for HTML files, whereas under
+Windows/DOS <code>".htm"</code> is more commonly used.
+<p><br>So to map <code>"html"</code> to <code>"htm"</code> you would use:
+<p><br><code> mangled map = (*.html *.htm)</code>
+<p><br>One very useful case is to remove the annoying <code>";1"</code> off the ends
+of filenames on some CDROMS (only visible under some UNIXes). To do
+this use a map of (*;1 *).
+<p><br><strong>default:</strong>
+<code> no mangled map</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> mangled map = (*;1 *)</code>
+<p><br><a name="manglednames"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>mangled names (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to
+DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS
+names should simply be ignored.
+<p><br>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a> for details
+on how to control the mangling process.
+<p><br>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the
+rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and
+appear as the first (up to) five characters of the mangled name.
+<p><br><li > A tilde <code>"~"</code> is appended to the first part of the mangled
+name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the
+original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final
+extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation
+only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three
+characters.
+<p><br>Note that the character to use may be specified using the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglingchar"><strong>"mangling char"</strong></a> option, if you don't like
+<code>'~'</code>.
+<p><br><li > The first three alphanumeric characters of the final extension
+are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the extension of the
+mangled name. The final extension is defined as that part of the
+original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no dots in the
+filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except in the case
+of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidefiles"><strong>"hidden files"</strong></a> - see below).
+<p><br><li > Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS
+hidden files. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames,
+but with the leading dot removed and <code>"___"</code> as its extension regardless
+of actual original extension (that's three underscores).
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric
+characters.
+<p><br>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory
+share the same first five alphanumeric characters. The probability of
+such a clash is 1/1300.
+<p><br>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between UNIX
+directories from Windows/DOS while retaining the long UNIX
+filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension from
+Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names do not
+change between sessions.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> mangled names = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> mangled names = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="manglingchar"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>mangling char (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls what character is used as the <em>"magic"</em> character in
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglednames"><strong>name mangling</strong></a>. The default is a <code>'~'</code> but
+this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set it to
+whatever you prefer.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> mangling char = ~</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> mangling char = ^</code>
+<p><br><a name="mangledstack"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>mangled stack (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter controls the number of mangled names that should be
+cached in the Samba server <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>.
+<p><br>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names (extensions are
+only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters or contains upper
+case characters).
+<p><br>The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled names can be
+successfully converted to correct long UNIX names. However, large
+stack sizes will slow most directory access. Smaller stacks save
+memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes).
+<p><br>It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long file names, so
+be prepared for some surprises!
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> mangled stack = 50</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> mangled stack = 100</code>
+<p><br><a name="maparchive"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>map archive (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to
+the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file
+has been modified since its last backup. One motivation for this
+option it to keep Samba/your PC from making any file it touches from
+becoming executable under UNIX. This can be quite annoying for shared
+source code, documents, etc...
+<p><br>Note that this requires the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a>
+parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out
+(ie. it must include 100). See the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create
+mask"</strong></a> for details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> map archive = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> map archive = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="maphidden"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>map hidden (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the
+UNIX world execute bit.
+<p><br>Note that this requires the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> to be
+set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (ie. it must
+include 001). See the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a>
+for details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> map hidden = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> map hidden = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="mapsystem"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>map system (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the
+UNIX group execute bit.
+<p><br>Note that this requires the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> to be
+set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (ie. it must
+include 010). See the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a>
+for details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> map system = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> map system = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="maptoguest"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>map to guest (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is only useful in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> modes
+other than <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security=share"</strong></a> - ie. user,
+server, and domain.
+<p><br>This parameter can take three different values, which tell
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> what to do with user login requests that
+don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.
+<p><br>The three settings are :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>"Never"</strong> - Means user login requests with an invalid password
+are rejected. This is the default.
+<p><br><li > <strong>"Bad User"</strong> - Means user logins with an invalid password are
+rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is
+treated as a guest login and mapped into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest
+account"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><li > <strong>"Bad Password"</strong> - Means user logins with an invalid
+password are treated as a guest login and mapped into the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. Note that this can
+cause problems as it means that any user mistyping their
+password will be silently logged on a <strong>"guest"</strong> - and
+will not know the reason they cannot access files they think
+they should - there will have been no message given to them
+that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will
+<em>*hate*</em> you if you set the <strong>"map to guest"</strong> parameter
+this way :-).
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>Note that this parameter is needed to set up <strong>"Guest"</strong> share
+services when using <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> modes other than
+share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being
+requested is <em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has
+successfully authenticated the client so the server cannot make
+authentication decisions at the correct time (connection to the
+share) for <strong>"Guest"</strong> shares.
+<p><br>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this parameter
+maps to the old compile-time setting of the GUEST_SESSSETUP value
+in local.h.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> map to guest = Never</code>
+ <strong>Example</strong>:
+<code> map to guest = Bad User</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxconnections"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max connections (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service
+to be limited. If <strong>"max connections"</strong> is greater than 0 then
+connections will be refused if this number of connections to the
+service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of
+connections may be made.
+<p><br>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files
+will be stored in the directory specified by the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdirectory"><strong>"lock
+directory"</strong></a> option.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max connections = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> max connections = 10</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxdisksize"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max disk size (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of
+disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be
+not larger than 100 MB in size.
+<p><br>Note that this option does not limit the amount of data you can put on
+the disk. In the above case you could still store much more than 100
+MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks for the amount of free disk
+space or the total disk size then the result will be bounded by the
+amount specified in <strong>"max disk size"</strong>.
+<p><br>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs in some pieces of
+software that can't handle very large disks, particularly disks over
+1GB in size.
+<p><br>A <strong>"max disk size"</strong> of 0 means no limit.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max disk size = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> max disk size = 1000</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxlogsize"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max log size (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log
+file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is
+exceeded it will rename the file, adding a <code>".old"</code> extension.
+<p><br>A size of 0 means no limit.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max log size = 5000</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> max log size = 1000</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxmux"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max mux (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous
+SMB operations that samba tells the client it will allow. You should
+never need to set this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max mux = 50</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxopenfiles"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>maxopenfiles (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> file serving process may have open for
+a client at any one time. The default for this parameter is set
+very high (10,000) as Samba uses only one bit per un-opened file.
+<p><br>The limit of the number of open files is usually set by the
+UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter
+so you should never need to touch this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max open files = 10000</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxpacket"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max packet (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a name="<strong>"packetsize"</strong>"></a>(packetsize).
+<p><br><a name="maxttl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max ttl (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option tells <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> what the default 'time
+to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> is requesting a name using either a
+broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to
+change this parameter. The default is 3 days.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max ttl = 259200</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxwinsttl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max wins ttl (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option tells <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> when acting as a WINS
+server <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>(wins support =true)</strong></a> what the maximum
+'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this
+parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minwinsttl"><strong>"min wins ttl"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max wins ttl = 518400</code>
+<p><br><a name="maxxmit"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>max xmit (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated
+by Samba. The default is 65535, which is the maximum. In some cases
+you may find you get better performance with a smaller value. A value
+below 2048 is likely to cause problems.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> max xmit = 65535</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> max xmit = 8192</code>
+<p><br><a name="messagecommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>message command (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup
+style message.
+<p><br>This would normally be a command that would deliver the message
+somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination.
+<p><br>An example is:
+<p><br><code> message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &amp;</code>
+<p><br>This delivers the message using <strong>xedit</strong>, then removes it
+afterwards. <em>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN
+IMMEDIATELY</em>. That's why I have the <code>'&amp;'</code> on the end. If it doesn't
+return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages
+(they should recover after 30secs, hopefully).
+<p><br>All messages are delivered as the global guest user. The command takes
+the standard substitutions, although <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a> won't work
+(<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentU"><strong>%U</strong></a> may be better in this case).
+<p><br>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply. In
+particular:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <code>"%s"</code> = the filename containing the message.
+<p><br><li > <code>"%t"</code> = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the server
+name).
+<p><br><li > <code>"%f"</code> = who the message is from.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your
+fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have.
+<p><br>Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:
+<p><br><code>message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on %m' root &lt; %s; rm %s</code>
+<p><br>If you don't have a message command then the message won't be
+delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was an
+error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code and carries
+on regardless, saying that the message was delivered.
+<p><br>If you want to silently delete it then try:
+<p><br><code>"message command = rm %s"</code>.
+<p><br>For the really adventurous, try something like this:
+<p><br><code>message command = csh -c 'csh &lt; %s |&amp; /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m; rm %s' &amp;</code>
+<p><br>this would execute the command as a script on the server, then give
+them the result in a WinPopup message. Note that this could cause a
+loop if you send a message from the server using smbclient! You better
+wrap the above in a script that checks for this :-)
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> no message command</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &amp;</code>
+<p><br><a name="minprintspace"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>min print space (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available
+before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in
+kilobytes. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print
+job.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>printing</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> min print space = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> min print space = 2000</code>
+<p><br><a name="minwinsttl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>min wins ttl (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option tells <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> when acting as a WINS
+server <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>(wins support = true)</strong></a> what the minimum
+'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this
+parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds).
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> min wins ttl = 21600</code>
+<p><br><a name="nameresolveorder"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>name resolve order (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine
+what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP
+addresses. The option takes a space separated string of different name
+resolution options.
+<p><br>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They cause
+names to be resolved as follows :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>lmhosts</strong> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file.
+<p><br><li > <strong>host</strong> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution,
+using the system /etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name
+resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or
+Solaris this may be controlled by the <em>/etc/nsswitch.conf</em> file).
+<p><br><li > <strong>wins</strong> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsserver"><strong>wins server</strong></a> parameter. If no WINS server has
+been specified this method will be ignored.
+<p><br><li > <strong>bcast</strong> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
+listed in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a> parameter. This is the
+least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the
+target host being on a locally connected subnet.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host</code>
+<p><br>This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined first, followed
+by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal system hostname lookup.
+<p><br><a name="netbiosaliases"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>netbios aliases (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This
+allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If
+a machine is acting as a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>browse server</strong></a> or
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a> none of these names will be
+advertised as either browse server or logon servers, only the primary
+name of the machine will be advertised with these capabilities.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>"netbios name"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> empty string (no additional names)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2</code>
+<p><br><a name="netbiosname"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>netbios name (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By
+default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name.
+If a machine is a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>browse server</strong></a> or
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a> this name (or the first component
+of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are
+advertised under.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>"netbios aliases"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> Machine DNS name.</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> netbios name = MYNAME</code>
+<p><br><a name="nishomedir"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>nis homedir (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use an
+automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a
+workstation on demand from a remote server.
+<p><br>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory server,
+but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two network hops
+would be required to access the users home directory if the logon
+server told the client to use itself as the SMB server for home
+directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can be very
+slow.
+<p><br>This option allows Samba to return the home share as being on a
+different server to the logon server and as long as a Samba daemon is
+running on the home directory server, it will be mounted on the Samba
+client directly from the directory server. When Samba is returning the
+home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homedirmap"><strong>"homedir map"</strong></a> and return the server listed
+there.
+<p><br>Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS
+system and the Samba server with this option must also be a
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> nis homedir = false</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> nis homedir = true</code>
+<p><br><a name="ntpipesupport"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>nt pipe support (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter controlls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific
+<code>IPC$</code> pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left
+alone.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> nt pipe support = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="ntsmbsupport"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>nt smb support (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter controlls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+will negotiate NT specific SMB support with Windows NT
+clients. Although this is a developer debugging option and should be
+left alone, benchmarking has discovered that Windows NT clients give
+faster performance with this option set to <code>"no"</code>. This is still
+being investigated. If this option is set to <code>"no"</code> then Samba
+offers exactly the same SMB calls that versions prior to Samba2.0
+offered. This information may be of use if any users are having
+problems with NT SMB support.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> nt support = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="nullpasswords"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>null passwords (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> null passwords = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> null passwords = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="olelockingcompatibility"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ole locking compatibility (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter allows an administrator to turn off the byte range lock
+manipulation that is done within Samba to give compatibility for OLE
+applications. Windows OLE applications use byte range locking as a
+form of inter-process communication, by locking ranges of bytes around
+the 2^32 region of a file range. This can cause certain UNIX lock
+managers to crash or otherwise cause problems. Setting this parameter
+to <code>"no"</code> means you trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases
+correctly.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ole locking compatibility = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> ole locking compatibility = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="onlyguest"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>only guest (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>A synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="onlyuser"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>only user (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with
+usernames not in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user=</strong></a> list will be allowed. By
+default this option is disabled so a client can supply a username to
+be used by the server.
+<p><br>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the
+service name. This can be annoying for the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a>
+section. To get around this you could use "<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user</strong></a> =
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>" which means your <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user"</strong></a> list
+will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name
+of the user.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> only user = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> only user = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="oplocks"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>oplocks (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean option tells smbd whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic
+locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can
+dramatically (approx 30% or more) improve the speed of access to files
+on Samba servers. It allows the clients to agressively cache files
+locally and you may want to disable this option for unreliable network
+environments (it is turned on by default in Windows NT Servers). For
+more information see the file Speed.txt in the Samba docs/ directory.
+<p><br>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files on a per share basis.
+See the 'veto oplock files' parameter. On some systems oplocks are recognised
+by the underlying operating system. This allows data synchronisation between
+all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local
+UNIX process. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>kernel oplocks</strong></a> parameter
+for details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> oplocks = True</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> oplocks = False</code>
+<p><br><a name="oslevel"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>os level (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for
+browse elections. The value of this parameter determines whether
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> has a chance of becoming a local master
+browser for the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>WORKGROUP</strong></a> in the local broadcast
+area. The default is zero, which means <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+lose elections to Windows machines. See BROWSING.txt in the Samba
+docs/ directory for details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> os level = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> os level = 65 ; This will win against any NT Server</code>
+<p><br><a name="packetsize"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>packet size (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a deprecated parameter that how no effect on the current
+Samba code. It is left in the parameter list to prevent breaking
+old <strong>smb.conf</strong> files.
+<p><br><a name="panicaction"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>panic action (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be
+called when either <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> or
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> crashes. This is usually used to draw
+attention to the fact that a problem occured.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> panic action = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><a name="passwdchat"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>passwd chat (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This string controls the <em>"chat"</em> conversation that takes places
+between <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and the local password changing
+program to change the users password. The string describes a sequence
+of response-receive pairs that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> uses to
+determine what to send to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>passwd</strong></a> program
+and what to expect back. If the expected output is not received then
+the password is not changed.
+<p><br>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what
+local methods are used for password control (such as NIS etc).
+<p><br>The string can contain the macros <code>"%o"</code> and <code>"%n"</code> which are
+substituted for the old and new passwords respectively. It can also
+contain the standard macros <code>"\n"</code>, <code>"\r"</code>, <code>"\t"</code> and <code>"\s"</code>
+to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab and space.
+<p><br>The string can also contain a <code>'*'</code> which matches any sequence of
+characters.
+<p><br>Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into
+a single string.
+<p><br>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a fullstop
+<code>"."</code> then no string is sent. Similarly, is the expect string is a
+fullstop then no string is expected.
+<p><br>Note that if the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>
+parameter is set to true, then this sequence is called <em>*AS ROOT*</em>
+when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without
+access to the old password cleartext. In this case the old password
+cleartext is set to <code>""</code> (the empty string).
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchatdebug"><strong>"passwd chat
+debug"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<pre>
+ passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<pre>
+ passwd chat = *old*password* %o\n *new*password* %n\n *new*password* %n\n *changed*
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><a name="passwdchatdebug"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>passwd chat debug (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in
+<code>"debug"</code> mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from
+the passwd chat are printed in the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> log with
+a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>"debug level"</strong></a> of 100. This is a dangerous
+option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> log. It is available to help Samba admins
+debug their <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>"passwd chat"</strong></a> scripts when calling
+the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a> and should be turned off
+after this has been done. This parameter is off by default.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>"passwd chat"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd
+program"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> passwd chat debug = True</code>
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> passwd chat debug = False</code>
+<p><br><a name="passwdprogram"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>passwd program (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords.
+Any occurrences of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a> will be replaced with the
+user name. The user name is checked for existance before calling the
+password changing program.
+<p><br>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <em>"reasonable"</em>
+passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case
+chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as
+Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that if the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>
+parameter is set to <code>"True"</code> then this program is called <em>*AS
+ROOT*</em> before the SMB password in the
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpassswd</strong></a> file is changed. If this UNIX
+password change fails, then <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will fail to
+change the SMB password also (this is by design).
+<p><br>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a> parameter is
+set this parameter <em>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</em> for <em>ALL</em> programs
+called, and must be examined for security implications. Note that by
+default <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a> is set to
+<code>"False"</code>.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> passwd program = /bin/passwd</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> passwd program = /sbin/passwd %u</code>
+<p><br><a name="passwordlevel"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>password level (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case
+passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for
+some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1
+protocol, but leaves them alone when using COREPLUS!
+<p><br>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters that may be
+upper case in passwords.
+<p><br>For example, say the password given was <code>"FRED"</code>. If <strong>password
+level</strong> is set to 1, the following combinations would be tried if
+<code>"FRED"</code> failed:
+<p><br><code>"Fred"</code>, <code>"fred"</code>, <code>"fRed"</code>, <code>"frEd"</code>, <code>"freD"</code>
+<p><br>If <strong>password level</strong> was set to 2, the following combinations would
+also be tried:
+<p><br><code>"FRed"</code>, <code>"FrEd"</code>, <code>"FreD"</code>, <code>"fREd"</code>, <code>"fReD"</code>,
+<code>"frED"</code>, <code>..</code>
+<p><br>And so on.
+<p><br>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely it is that a
+mixed case password will be matched against a single case
+password. However, you should be aware that use of this parameter
+reduces security and increases the time taken to process a new
+connection.
+<p><br>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password
+as is and the password in all-lower case.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> password level = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> password level = 4</code>
+<p><br><a name="passwordserver"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>password server (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such as a WinNT box)
+with this option, and using <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security = domain"</strong></a> or
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security = server"</strong></a> you can get Samba to do all
+its username/password validation via a remote server.
+<p><br>This options sets the name of the password server to use. It must be a
+NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is different from its
+internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS name to the lmhosts
+file which is stored in the same directory as the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file.
+<p><br>The name of the password server is looked up using the parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>"name resolve order="</strong></a> and so may resolved
+by any method and order described in that parameter.
+<p><br>The password server much be a machine capable of using the "LM1.2X002"
+or the "LM NT 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security
+mode.
+<p><br>NOTE: Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is
+only as secure as your password server. <em>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD
+SERVER THAT YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</em>.
+<p><br>Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving. This will
+cause a loop and could lock up your Samba server!
+<p><br>The name of the password server takes the standard substitutions, but
+probably the only useful one is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentm"><strong>%m</strong></a>, which means
+the Samba server will use the incoming client as the password
+server. If you use this then you better trust your clients, and you
+better restrict them with hosts allow!
+<p><br>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security"</strong></a> parameter is set to
+<strong>"domain"</strong>, then the list of machines in this option must be a list
+of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>Domain</strong></a>, as the Samba server is cryptographically
+in that domain, and will use crpytographically authenticated RPC calls
+to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a> is that if you list
+several hosts in the <strong>"password server"</strong> option then
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will try each in turn till it finds one
+that responds. This is useful in case your primary server goes down.
+<p><br>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security"</strong></a> parameter is set to
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"server"</strong></a>, then there are different
+restrictions that <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>
+doesn't suffer from:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > You may list several password servers in the <strong>"password server"
+parameter, however if an <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> makes a connection
+to a password server, and then the password server fails, no more
+users will be able to be authenticated from this
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>. This is a restriction of the SMB/CIFS
+protocol when in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"security=server"</strong></a> mode
+and cannot be fixed in Samba.
+<p><br><li > If you are using a Windows NT server as your password server then
+you will have to ensure that your users are able to login from the
+Samba server, as when in
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"security=server"</strong></a> mode the network
+logon will appear to come from there rather than from the users
+workstation.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> password server = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2</code>
+<p><br><a name="path"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>path (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service
+is to be given access. In the case of printable services, this is
+where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for
+printing.
+<p><br>For a printable service offering guest access, the service should be
+readonly and the path should be world-writable and have the sticky bit
+set. This is not mandatory of course, but you probably won't get the
+results you expect if you do otherwise.
+<p><br>Any occurrences of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a> in the path will be replaced
+with the UNIX username that the client is using on this
+connection. Any occurrences of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentm"><strong>%m</strong></a> will be replaced
+by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from. These
+replacements are very useful for setting up pseudo home directories
+for users.
+<p><br>Note that this path will be based on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdir"><strong>"root dir"</strong></a> if
+one was specified.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> path = /home/fred</code>
+<p><br><a name="postexec"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>postexec (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is
+disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run
+as the root on some systems.
+<p><br>An interesting example may be do unmount server resources:
+<p><br><code>postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</code>
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>preexec</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none (no command executed)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> postexec = echo "%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)" &gt;&gt; /tmp/log</code>
+<p><br><a name="postscript"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>postscript (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter forces a printer to interpret the print files as
+postscript. This is done by adding a <code>%!</code> to the start of print output.
+<p><br>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist in putting
+a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then confuses your
+printer.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> postscript = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> postscript = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="preexec"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>preexec (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is
+connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.
+<p><br>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every
+time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' &amp;
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-</strong>
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>postexec</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> none (no command executed)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" &gt;&gt; /tmp/log</code>
+<p><br><a name="preferredmaster"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>preferred master (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter controls if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> is a
+preferred master browser for its workgroup.
+<p><br>If this is set to true, on startup, <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the
+election. It is recommended that this parameter is used in
+conjunction with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainmaster"><strong>"domain master = yes"</strong></a>, so
+that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> can guarantee becoming a domain
+master.
+<p><br>Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts
+(whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred master
+browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and
+continuously attempt to become the local master browser. This will
+result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing
+capabilities.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oslevel"><strong>os level</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> preferred master = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> preferred master = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="preferedmaster"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>prefered master (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preferredmaster"><strong>"preferred master"</strong></a> for people
+who cannot spell :-).
+<p><br><a name="preload"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>preload</strong></strong>
+Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#autoservices"><strong>"auto services"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="preservecase"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>preserve case (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the
+client passes, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code> case.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> preserve case = yes</code>
+<p><br>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a> for a
+fuller discussion.
+<p><br><a name="printcommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>print command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command
+will be used via a <code>system()</code> call to process the spool
+file. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to
+the host's printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this
+be the case. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever
+command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been
+processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool files.
+<p><br>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used verbatim,
+with two exceptions: All occurrences of <code>"%s"</code> will be replaced by
+the appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of <code>"%p"</code> will
+be replaced by the appropriate printer name. The spool file name is
+generated automatically by the server, the printer name is discussed
+below.
+<p><br>The full path name will be used for the filename if <code>"%s"</code> is not
+preceded by a <code>'/'</code>. If you don't like this (it can stuff up some
+lpq output) then use <code>"%f"</code> instead. Any occurrences of <code>"%f"</code> get
+replaced by the spool filename without the full path at the front.
+<p><br>The print command <em>MUST</em> contain at least one occurrence of <code>"%s"</code>
+or <code>"%f"</code> - the <code>"%p"</code> is optional. At the time a job is
+submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <code>"%p"</code> will be
+silently removed from the printer command.
+<p><br>If specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>"[global]"</strong></a> section, the print
+command given will be used for any printable service that does not
+have its own print command specified.
+<p><br>If there is neither a specified print command for a printable service
+nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not
+processed and (most importantly) not removed.
+<p><br>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the <code>"nobody"</code>
+account. If this happens then create an alternative guest account that
+can print and set the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a> in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>"[global]"</strong></a> section.
+<p><br>You can form quite complex print commands by realising that they are
+just passed to a shell. For example the following will log a print
+job, print the file, then remove it. Note that <code>';'</code> is the usual
+separator for command in shell scripts.
+<p><br><code>print command = echo Printing %s &gt;&gt; /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</code>
+<p><br>You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you
+normally print files on your system. The default for the parameter
+varies depending on the setting of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a>
+parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+ For <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :
+<code> print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</code>
+<p><br>For <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> SYS or HPUX :
+<code> print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</code>
+<p><br>For <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> SOFTQ :
+<code> print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s</code>
+<p><br><a name="printok"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>print ok (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printable"><strong>printable</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="printable"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printable (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If this parameter is <code>"yes"</code>, then clients may open, write to and
+submit spool files on the directory specified for the service.
+<p><br>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service
+path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data. The
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>"read only"</strong></a> parameter controls only non-printing
+access to the resource.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> printable = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> printable = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="printcap"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printcap (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>printcapname</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="printcapname"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printcap name (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default
+printcap name used by the server (usually /etc/printcap). See the
+discussion of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> section above for
+reasons why you might want to do this.
+<p><br>On System V systems that use <strong>lpstat</strong> to list available printers you
+can use <code>"printcap name = lpstat"</code> to automatically obtain lists of
+available printers. This is the default for systems that define SYSV
+at configure time in Samba (this includes most System V based
+systems). If <strong>"printcap name"</strong> is set to <strong>lpstat</strong> on these systems
+then Samba will launch <code>"lpstat -v"</code> and attempt to parse the output
+to obtain a printer list.
+<p><br>A minimal printcap file would look something like this:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ print1|My Printer 1
+ print2|My Printer 2
+ print3|My Printer 3
+ print4|My Printer 4
+ print5|My Printer 5
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>where the <code>'|'</code> separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the
+second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a
+comment.
+<p><br><em>NOTE</em>: Under AIX the default printcap name is
+<code>"/etc/qconfig"</code>. Samba will assume the file is in AIX <code>"qconfig"</code>
+format if the string <code>"/qconfig"</code> appears in the printcap filename.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> printcap name = /etc/printcap</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</code>
+<p><br><a name="printer"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printer (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs
+spooled through a printable service will be sent.
+<p><br>If specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section, the printer
+name given will be used for any printable service that does not have
+its own printer name specified.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+ none (but may be <code>"lp"</code> on many systems)
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+ printer name = laserwriter
+<p><br><a name="printerdriver"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printer driver (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to control the string that clients receive when
+they ask the server for the printer driver associated with a
+printer. If you are using Windows95 or WindowsNT then you can use this
+to automate the setup of printers on your system.
+<p><br>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case sensitive)
+that describes the appropriate printer driver for your system. If you
+don't know the exact string to use then you should first try with no
+<strong>"printer driver"</strong> option set and the client will give you a list of
+printer drivers. The appropriate strings are shown in a scrollbox
+after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverfile"><strong>"printer driver file"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+ printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L
+<p><br><a name="printerdriverfile"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printer driver file (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver definition file,
+used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is to be found. If
+this is not set, the default is :
+<p><br><code>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY/lib/printers.def</code>
+<p><br>This file is created from Windows 95 <code>"msprint.def"</code> files found on
+the Windows 95 client system. For more details on setting up serving
+of printer drivers to Windows 95 clients, see the documentation file
+in the docs/ directory, PRINTER_DRIVER.txt.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> None (set in compile).</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> printer driver file = /usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</code>
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverlocation"><strong>"printer driver location"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="printerdriverlocation"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printer driver location (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer share where to
+find the printer driver files for the automatic installation of
+drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up to serve printer
+drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to
+<p><br><code>\\MACHINE\aPRINTER$</code>
+<p><br>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, and PRINTER$
+is a share you set up for serving printer driver files. For more
+details on setting this up see the documentation file in the docs/
+directory, PRINTER_DRIVER.txt.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> None</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$</code>
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverfile"><strong>"printer driver file"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="printername"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printer name (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printer"><strong>printer</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="printing"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printing (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted
+on your system, and also affects the default values for the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcommand"><strong>"print command"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpqcommand"><strong>"lpq
+command"</strong></a> <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lppausecommand"><strong>"lppause command"</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpresumecommand"><strong>"lpresume command"</strong></a>, and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lprmcommand"><strong>"lprm
+command"</strong></a>.
+<p><br>Currently eight printing styles are supported. They are
+<strong>"printing=BSD"</strong>, <strong>"printing=AIX"</strong>, <strong>"printing=LPRNG"</strong>,
+<strong>"printing=PLP"</strong>,
+<strong>"printing=SYSV"</strong>,<strong>"printing="HPUX"</strong>,<strong>"printing=QNX"</strong> and
+<strong>"printing=SOFTQ"</strong>.
+<p><br>To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when using
+these three options use the <a href="testparm"><strong>"testparm"</strong></a> program.
+<p><br>This option can be set on a per printer basis
+<p><br>See also the discussion in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> section.
+<p><br><a name="protocol"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>protocol (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level
+that will be supported by the server.
+<p><br>Possible values are :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > CORE: Earliest version. No concept of user names.
+<p><br><li > COREPLUS: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency.
+<p><br><li > LANMAN1: First <em>"modern"</em> version of the protocol. Long
+filename support.
+<p><br><li > LANMAN2: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
+<p><br><li > NT1: Current up to date version of the protocol. Used by Windows
+NT. Known as CIFS.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
+phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
+protocol.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> protocol = NT1</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> protocol = LANMAN1</code>
+<p><br><a name="public"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>public (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>"guest ok"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="queuepausecommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>queuepause command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host
+in order to pause the printerqueue.
+<p><br>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
+as its only parameter and stops the printerqueue, such that no longer
+jobs are submitted to the printer.
+<p><br>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be
+issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 &amp; NT.
+<p><br>If a <code>"%p"</code> is given then the printername is put in its
+place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
+<p><br>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
+command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> depends on the setting of "printing ="</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> queuepause command = disable %p</code>
+<p><br><a name="queueresumecommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>queueresume command (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host
+in order to resume the printerqueue. It is the command to undo the
+behaviour that is caused by the previous parameter
+(<a href="smb.conf.5.html#queuepausecommand"><strong>"queuepause command</strong></a>).
+<p><br>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
+as its only parameter and resumes the printerqueue, such that queued
+jobs are resubmitted to the printer.
+<p><br>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be
+issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 &amp; NT.
+<p><br>If a <code>"%p"</code> is given then the printername is put in its
+place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
+<p><br>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
+command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> depends on the setting of "printing ="</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> queuepause command = enable %p</code>
+<p><br><a name="readbmpx"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>read bmpx (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+will support the "Read Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used
+and defaults to off. You should never need to set this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+ read bmpx = No
+<p><br><a name="readlist"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>read list (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a
+service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be
+given write access, no matter what the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>"read only"</strong></a>
+option is set to. The list can include group names using the syntax
+described in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writelist"><strong>"write list"</strong></a> parameter and
+the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> read list = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> read list = mary, @students</code>
+<p><br><a name="readonly"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>read only (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Note that this is an inverted synonym for
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#writable"><strong>"writable"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeok"><strong>"write ok"</strong></a>.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writable"><strong>"writable"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeok"><strong>"write
+ok"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="readprediction"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>read prediction (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br><em>NOTE</em>: This code is currently disabled in Samba2.0 and
+may be removed at a later date. Hence this parameter has
+no effect.
+<p><br>This options enables or disables the read prediction code used to
+speed up reads from the server. When enabled the server will try to
+pre-read data from the last accessed file that was opened read-only
+while waiting for packets.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> read prediction = False</code>
+<p><br><a name="readraw"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>read raw (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw
+read SMB requests when transferring data to clients.
+<p><br>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet. This
+typically provides a major performance benefit.
+<p><br>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size
+incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and for
+these clients you may need to disable raw reads.
+<p><br>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left
+severely alone. See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeraw"><strong>"write raw"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> read raw = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="readsize"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>read size (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The option <strong>"read size"</strong> affects the overlap of disk reads/writes
+with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in
+several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and
+SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing
+the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or
+in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before
+all the data has been read from disk.
+<p><br>This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and network access
+are similar, having very little effect when the speed of one is much
+greater than the other.
+<p><br>The default value is 2048, but very little experimentation has been
+done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely that the
+best value will vary greatly between systems anyway. A value over
+65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate memory
+unnecessarily.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> read size = 2048</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> read size = 8192</code>
+<p><br><a name="remoteannounce"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>remote announce (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to setup <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to
+periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an
+arbitrary workgroup name.
+<p><br>This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote
+workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don't
+work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP
+packets to.
+<p><br>For example:
+<p><br><code> remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF</code>
+<p><br>the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself to the two given IP
+addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the
+workgroup name then the one given in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>"workgroup"</strong></a> parameter is used instead.
+<p><br>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses
+of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known
+browse masters if your network config is that stable.
+<p><br>See the documentation file BROWSING.txt in the docs/ directory.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> remote announce = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF</code>
+<p><br><a name="remotebrowsesync"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>remote browse sync (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to setup <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to
+periodically request synchronisation of browse lists with the master
+browser of a samba server that is on a remote segment. This option
+will allow you to gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across
+routed networks. This is done in a manner that does not work with any
+non-samba servers.
+<p><br>This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients to
+appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation
+rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can
+send IP packets to.
+<p><br>For example:
+<p><br><code> remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255</code>
+<p><br>the above line would cause <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to request the
+master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to synchronise
+their browse lists with the local server.
+<p><br>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses
+of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known
+browse masters if your network config is that stable. If a machine IP
+address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that the remote
+machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse
+master on it's segment.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> remote browse sync = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255</code>
+<p><br><a name="revalidate"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>revalidate (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Note that this option only works with
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security=share"</strong></a> and will be ignored if
+this is not the case.
+<p><br>This option controls whether Samba will allow a previously validated
+username/password pair to be used to attach to a share. Thus if you
+connect to <code>\\server\share1</code> then to <code>\\server\share2</code> it won't
+automatically allow the client to request connection to the second
+share as the same username as the first without a password.
+<p><br>If <strong>"revalidate"</strong> is <code>"True"</code> then the client will be denied
+automatic access as the same username.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> revalidate = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> revalidate = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="root"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>root (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdirectory"><strong>"root directory"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="rootdir"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>root dir (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdirectory"><strong>"root directory"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="rootdirectory"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>root directory (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The server will <code>"chroot()"</code> (ie. Change it's root directory) to
+this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure
+operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in
+one of the service entries. It may also check for, and deny access to,
+soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use
+<code>".."</code> in file names to access other directories (depending on the
+setting of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#widelinks"><strong>"wide links"</strong></a> parameter).
+<p><br>Adding a <strong>"root directory"</strong> entry other than <code>"/"</code> adds an extra
+level of security, but at a price. It absolutely ensures that no
+access is given to files not in the sub-tree specified in the <strong>"root
+directory"</strong> option, <em>*including*</em> some files needed for complete
+operation of the server. To maintain full operability of the server
+you will need to mirror some system files into the <strong>"root
+directory"</strong> tree. In particular you will need to mirror /etc/passwd
+(or a subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed
+for printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is
+operating system dependent.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> root directory = /</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> root directory = /homes/smb</code>
+<p><br><a name="rootpostexec"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>root postexec (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is the same as the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>"postexec"</strong></a> parameter
+except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting
+filesystems (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>"postexec"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="rootpreexec"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>root preexec (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is the same as the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>"preexec"</strong></a> parameter except
+that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting
+filesystems (such as cdroms) before a connection is finalised.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>"preexec"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="security"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>security (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most
+important settings in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file.
+<p><br>The option sets the <code>"security mode bit"</code> in replies to protocol
+negotiations with <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to turn share level
+security on or off. Clients decide based on this bit whether (and how)
+to transfer user and password information to the server.
+<p><br>The default is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser">"security=user"</a>, as this is
+the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows
+NT.
+<p><br>The alternatives are <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security = share"</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"security = server"</strong></a> or
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><em>*****NOTE THAT THIS DEFAULT IS DIFFERENT IN SAMBA2.0 THAN FOR
+PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF SAMBA *******</em>.
+<p><br>In previous versions of Samba the default was
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security=share"</strong></a> mainly because that was
+the only option at one stage.
+<p><br>There is a bug in WfWg that has relevence to this setting. When in
+user or server level security a WfWg client will totally ignore the
+password you type in the "connect drive" dialog box. This makes it
+very difficult (if not impossible) to connect to a Samba service as
+anyone except the user that you are logged into WfWg as.
+<p><br>If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their usernames on the
+UNIX machine then you will want to use <strong>"security = user"</strong>. If you
+mostly use usernames that don't exist on the UNIX box then use
+<strong>"security = share"</strong>.
+<p><br>You should also use <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>security=share</strong></a> if
+you want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest
+shares). This is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more
+difficult to setup guest shares with
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser"><strong>security=user</strong></a>, see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to
+guest"</strong></a>parameter for details.
+<p><br>It is possible to use <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> in a <em>"hybred
+mode"</em> where it is offers both user and share level security under
+different <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>NetBIOS aliases</strong></a>. See the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>NetBIOS aliases</strong></a> and the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#include"><strong>include</strong></a> parameters for more information.
+<p><br>The different settings will now be explained.
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="securityequalshare"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>"security=share"</strong></strong> When clients connect to a share level
+security server then need not log onto the server with a valid
+username and password before attempting to connect to a shared
+resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT
+will send a logon request with a username but no password when talking
+to a <strong>security=share</strong> server). Instead, the clients send
+authentication information (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the
+time they attempt to connect to that share.
+<p><br>Note that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> <em>*ALWAYS*</em> uses a valid UNIX
+user to act on behalf of the client, even in <strong>"security=share"</strong>
+level security.
+<p><br>As clients are not required to send a username to the server
+in share level security, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> uses several
+techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf
+of the client.
+<p><br>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given
+client password is constructed using the following methods :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a> parameter is set, then
+all the other stages are missed and only the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest
+account"</strong></a> username is checked.
+<p><br><li > Is a username is sent with the share connection request, then
+this username (after mapping - see <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamemap"><strong>"username
+map"</strong></a>), is added as a potential username.
+<p><br><li > If the client did a previous <em>"logon"</em> request (the
+SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB
+will be added as a potential username.
+<p><br><li > The name of the service the client requested is added
+as a potential username.
+<p><br><li > The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a
+potential username.
+<p><br><li > Any users on the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user"</strong></a> list are added
+as potential usernames.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a> parameter is not set, then
+this list is then tried with the supplied password. The first user for
+whom the password matches will be used as the UNIX user.
+<p><br>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a> parameter is set, or no
+username can be determined then if the share is marked as available to
+the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>, then this guest user will
+be used, otherwise access is denied.
+<p><br>Note that it can be <em>*very*</em> confusing in share-level security as to
+which UNIX username will eventually be used in granting access.
+<p><br>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD
+VALIDATION"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="securityequaluser"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>"security=user"</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is the default security setting in Samba2.0. With user-level
+security a client must first <code>"log-on"</code> with a valid username and
+password (which can be mapped using the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamemap"><strong>"username
+map"</strong></a> parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted passwords"</strong></a> parameter) can also
+be used in this security mode. Parameters such as
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a>, if set
+are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this
+connection, but only after the user has been successfully
+authenticated.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that the the name of the resource being requested is
+<em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has successfully
+authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user
+level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown
+users into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. See the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to guest"</strong></a> parameter for details on
+doing this.
+<p><br>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD
+VALIDATION"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="securityequalserver"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>"security=server"</strong></strong>
+<p><br>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by
+passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this fails it
+will revert to <strong>"security = user"</strong>, but note that if encrypted
+passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to
+checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid smbpasswd file
+to check users against. See the documentation file in the docs/
+directory ENCRYPTION.txt for details on how to set this up.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that from the clients point of view <strong>"security=server"</strong> is
+the same as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser"><strong>"security=user"</strong></a>. It only
+affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in
+any way affect what the client sees.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that the the name of the resource being requested is
+<em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has successfully
+authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in server
+level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown
+users into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. See the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to guest"</strong></a> parameter for details on
+doing this.
+<p><br>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD
+VALIDATION"</strong></a>.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>"password server"</strong></a> parameter.
+and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted passwords"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><a name="securityequaldomain"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>"security=domain"</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This mode will only work correctly if
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> has been used to add this machine
+into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted
+passwords"</strong></a> parameter to be set to <code>"true"</code>. In
+this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing
+it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the
+same way that a Windows NT Server would do.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the
+account on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid
+UNIX account to map file access to.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that from the clients point of view <strong>"security=domain"</strong> is
+the same as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser"><strong>"security=user"</strong></a>. It only
+affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in
+any way affect what the client sees.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that the the name of the resource being requested is
+<em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has successfully
+authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in domain
+level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown
+users into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. See the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to guest"</strong></a> parameter for details on
+doing this.
+<p><br>e,(BUG:) There is currently a bug in the implementation of
+<strong>"security=domain</strong> with respect to multi-byte character
+set usernames. The communication with a Domain Controller
+must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently does not widen
+multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus a multi-byte
+username will not be recognised correctly at the Domain Controller.
+This issue will be addressed in a future release.
+<p><br>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD
+VALIDATION"</strong></a>.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>"password server"</strong></a> parameter.
+and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted passwords"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> security = USER</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> security = DOMAIN</code>
+<p><br><a name="serverstring"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>server string (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in
+print manager and next to the IPC connection in <code>"net view"</code>. It can be
+any string that you wish to show to your users.
+<p><br>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine
+name.
+<p><br>A <code>"%v"</code> will be replaced with the Samba version number.
+<p><br>A <code>"%h"</code> will be replaced with the hostname.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> server string = Samba %v</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> server string = University of GNUs Samba Server</code>
+<p><br><a name="setdirectory"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>set directory (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If <code>"set directory = no"</code>, then users of the service may not use the
+setdir command to change directory.
+<p><br>The setdir command is only implemented in the Digital Pathworks
+client. See the Pathworks documentation for details.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> set directory = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> set directory = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="sharemodes"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>share modes (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This enables or disables the honouring of the <code>"share modes"</code> during a
+file open. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or
+write access to a file.
+<p><br>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so they are
+simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your UNIX doesn't
+support shared memory (almost all do).
+<p><br>The share modes that are enabled by this option are DENY_DOS,
+DENY_ALL, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE, DENY_NONE and DENY_FCB.
+<p><br>This option gives full share compatibility and enabled by default.
+<p><br>You should <em>*NEVER*</em> turn this parameter off as many Windows
+applications will break if you do so.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> share modes = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="sharedmemsize"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>shared mem size (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>It specifies the size of the shared memory (in bytes) to use between
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> processes. This parameter defaults to one
+megabyte of shared memory. It is possible that if you have a large
+server with many files open simultaneously that you may need to
+increase this parameter. Signs that this parameter is set too low are
+users reporting strange problems trying to save files (locking errors)
+and error messages in the smbd log looking like <code>"ERROR
+smb_shm_alloc : alloc of XX bytes failed"</code>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> shared mem size = 1048576</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> shared mem size = 5242880 ; Set to 5mb for a large number of files.</code>
+<p><br><a name="shortpreservecase"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>short preserve case (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3
+syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created
+upper case, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code> case. This
+option can be use with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preservecaseoption"><strong>"preserve case
+=yes"</strong></a> to permit long filenames to retain their
+case, while short names are lowered. Default <em>Yes</em>.
+<p><br>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>NAME MANGLING</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> short preserve case = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="smbpasswdfile"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>smb passwd file (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default
+the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> smb passwd file= &lt;compiled default&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> smb passwd file = /usr/samba/private/smbpasswd</code>
+<p><br><a name="smbrun"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>smbrun (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This sets the full path to the <strong>smbrun</strong> binary. This defaults to the
+value in the Makefile.
+<p><br>You must get this path right for many services to work correctly.
+<p><br>You should not need to change this parameter so long as Samba
+is installed correctly.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> smbrun=&lt;compiled default&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> smbrun = /usr/local/samba/bin/smbrun</code>
+<p><br><a name="socketaddress"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>socket address (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for
+connections on. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on
+the one server, each with a different configuration.
+<p><br>By default samba will accept connections on any address.
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> socket address = 192.168.2.20</code>
+<p><br><a name="socketoptions"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>socket options (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking
+with the client.
+<p><br>Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating
+systems which allow the connection to be tuned.
+<p><br>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for
+optimal performance for your local network. There is no way that Samba
+can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you must
+experiment and choose them yourself. We strongly suggest you read the
+appropriate documentation for your operating system first (perhaps
+<strong>"man setsockopt"</strong> will help).
+<p><br>You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket
+option" when you supply an option. This means you either mis-typed it
+or you need to add an include file to includes.h for your OS. If the
+latter is the case please send the patch to
+<a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you
+like, as long as your OS allows it.
+<p><br>This is the list of socket options currently settable using this
+option:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > SO_KEEPALIVE
+<p><br><li > SO_REUSEADDR
+<p><br><li > SO_BROADCAST
+<p><br><li > TCP_NODELAY
+<p><br><li > IPTOS_LOWDELAY
+<p><br><li > IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
+<p><br><li > SO_SNDBUF *
+<p><br><li > SO_RCVBUF *
+<p><br><li > SO_SNDLOWAT *
+<p><br><li > SO_RCVLOWAT *
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>Those marked with a <code>*</code> take an integer argument. The others can
+optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by
+default they will be enabled if you don't specify 1 or 0.
+<p><br>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION=VALUE for example
+<code>SO_SNDBUF=8192</code>. Note that you must not have any spaces before or after
+the = sign.
+<p><br>If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be
+<p><br><code>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code>
+<p><br>If you have a local network then you could try:
+<p><br><code>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</code>
+<p><br>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting
+IPTOS_THROUGHPUT.
+<p><br>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail
+completely. Use these options with caution!
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> socket options = TCP_NODELAY</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code>
+<p><br><a name="ssl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If it is set to
+"no", the SSL enabled samba behaves exactly like the non-SSL samba. If
+set to "yes", it depends on the variables <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhosts"><strong>"ssl
+hosts"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhostsresign"><strong>"ssl hosts resign"</strong></a>
+whether an SSL connection will be required.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl=no</code>
+ <strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> ssl=yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslCAcertDir"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl CA certDir (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This variable defines where to look up the Certification
+Autorities. The given directory should contain one file for each CA
+that samba will trust. The file name must be the hash value over the
+"Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory is set up is
+explained later in this document. All files within the directory that
+don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You don't need this
+variable if you don't verify client certificates.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslCAcertFile"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl CA certFile (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs. The
+certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big file and this
+variable points to the file. You will probably only use one of the two
+ways to define your CAs. The first choice is preferable if you have
+many CAs or want to be flexible, the second is perferable if you only
+have one CA and want to keep things simple (you won't need to create
+the hashed file names). You don't need this variable if you don't
+verify client certificates.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslciphers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl ciphers (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered during SSL
+negotiation. You should not set this variable unless you know what you
+are doing.
+<p><br><a name="sslclientcert"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl client cert (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>The certificate in this file is used by
+<a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a> if it exists. It's needed if the
+server requires a client certificate.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslclientkey"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl client key (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This is the private key for <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a>. It's
+only needed if the client should have a certificate.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslcompatibility"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl compatibility (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This variable defines whether SSLeay should be configured for bug
+compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is probably not
+desirable because currently no clients with SSL implementations other
+than SSLeay exist.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl compatibility = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslhosts"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl hosts (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>See <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhostsresign"><strong>"ssl hosts resign"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="sslhostsresign"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl hosts resign (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>These two variables define whether samba will go into SSL mode or
+not. If none of them is defined, samba will allow only SSL
+connections. If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhosts"><strong>"ssl hosts"</strong></a> variable lists
+hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name), only these
+hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the <strong>"ssl hosts resign"</strong>
+variable lists hosts, only these hosts will NOT be forced into SSL
+mode. The syntax for these two variables is the same as for the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>"hosts allow"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsdeny"><strong>"hosts
+deny"</strong></a> pair of variables, only that the subject of the
+decision is different: It's not the access right but whether SSL is
+used or not. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>"allow hosts"</strong></a> parameter for
+details. The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts
+outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*).
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl hosts = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<code> ssl hosts resign = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> ssl hosts resign = 192.168.</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslrequireclientcert"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl require clientcert (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>If this variable is set to <code>"yes"</code>, the server will not tolerate
+connections from clients that don't have a valid certificate. The
+directory/file given in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertDir"><strong>"ssl CA certDir"</strong></a> and
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertFile"><strong>"ssl CA certFile"</strong></a> will be used to look up the
+CAs that issued the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be
+verified positively, the connection will be terminated. If this
+variable is set to <code>"no"</code>, clients don't need certificates. Contrary
+to web applications you really <em>*should*</em> require client
+certificates. In the web environment the client's data is sensitive
+(credit card numbers) and the server must prove to be trustworthy. In
+a file server environment the server's data will be sensitive and the
+clients must prove to be trustworthy.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl require clientcert = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslrequireservercert"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl require servercert (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>If this variable is set to <code>"yes"</code>, the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a> will request a certificate from
+the server. Same as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslrequireclientcert"><strong>"ssl require
+clientcert"</strong></a> for the server.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl require servercert = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslservercert"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl server cert (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This is the file containing the server's certificate. The server _must_
+have a certificate. The file may also contain the server's private key.
+See later for how certificates and private keys are created.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl server cert = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslserverkey"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl server key (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This file contains the private key of the server. If this variable is
+not defined, the key is looked up in the certificate file (it may be
+appended to the certificate). The server <em>*must*</em> have a private key
+and the certificate <em>*must*</em> match this private key.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl server key = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><a name="sslversion"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>ssl version (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if
+the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure
+option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time.
+<p><br><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em>
+enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.
+<p><br>This enumeration variable defines the versions of the SSL protocol
+that will be used. <code>"ssl2or3"</code> allows dynamic negotiation of SSL v2
+or v3, <code>"ssl2"</code> results in SSL v2, <code>"ssl3"</code> results in SSL v3 and
+"tls1" results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer Security) is the
+(proposed?) new standard for SSL.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> ssl version = "ssl2or3"</code>
+<p><br><a name="statcache"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>stat cache (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter determines if <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will use a
+cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should
+never need to change this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> stat cache = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="statcachesize"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>stat cache size (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter determines the number of entries in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#statcache"><strong>stat
+cache</strong></a>. You should never need to change this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> stat cache size = 50</code>
+<p><br><a name="status"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>status (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This enables or disables logging of connections to a status file that
+<a href="smbstatus.1.html"><strong>smbstatus</strong></a> can read.
+<p><br>With this disabled <a href="smbstatus.1.html"><strong>smbstatus</strong></a> won't be able
+to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to
+change this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+ status = yes
+<p><br><a name="strictlocking"></a>
+dir(<strong>strict locking (S)</strong>)
+<p><br>This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the
+server. When this is set to <code>"yes"</code> the server will check every read and
+write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can
+be slow on some systems.
+<p><br>When strict locking is <code>"no"</code> the server does file lock checks only
+when the client explicitly asks for them.
+<p><br>Well behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important,
+so in the vast majority of cases <strong>"strict locking = no"</strong> is
+preferable.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> strict locking = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> strict locking = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="strictsync"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>strict sync (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell)
+seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to
+disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until
+the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in kernel disk
+buffers has been safely stored onto stable storate. This is very slow
+and should only be done rarely. Setting this parameter to "no" (the
+default) means that smbd ignores the Windows applications requests for
+a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the
+operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is
+little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many
+performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98
+explorer shell file copies.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syncalways"><strong>"sync always"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> strict sync = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> strict sync = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="stripdot"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>strip dot (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a boolean that controls whether to strip trailing dots off
+UNIX filenames. This helps with some CDROMs that have filenames ending
+in a single dot.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> strip dot = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> strip dot = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="syncalways"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>sync always (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always
+be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is
+false then the server will be guided by the client's request in each
+write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write
+should be synchronous). If this is true then every write will be
+followed by a fsync() call to ensure the data is written to disk.
+Note that the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictsync"><strong>"strict sync"</strong></a> parameter must be
+set to <code>"yes"</code> in order for this parameter to have any affect.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictsync"><strong>"strict sync"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> sync always = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>xample:</strong>
+<code> sync always = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="syslog"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>syslog (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the
+system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog
+LOG_ERR, debug level one maps onto LOG_WARNING, debug level two maps
+to LOG_NOTICE, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO. The paramter
+sets the threshold for doing the mapping, all Samba debug messages
+above this threashold are mapped to syslog LOG_DEBUG messages.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> syslog = 1</code>
+<p><br><a name="syslogonly"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>syslog only (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the
+system syslog only, and not to the debug log files.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> syslog only = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="timeoffset"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>time offset (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to
+local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs
+that have incorrect daylight saving time handling.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> time offset = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> time offset = 60</code>
+<p><br><a name="timeserver"></a>
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>time server (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter determines if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> advertises
+itself as a time server to Windows clients. The default is False.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> time server = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> time server = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="timestamplogs"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>timestamp logs (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Samba2.0 will a timestamps to all log entries by default. This
+can be distracting if you are attempting to debug a problem. This
+parameter allows the timestamping to be turned off.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> timestamp logs = True</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> timestamp logs = False</code>
+<p><br><a name="unixpasswordsync"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>unix password sync (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter controlls whether Samba attempts to synchronise
+the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB
+password in the smbpasswd file is changed. If this is set to true the
+program specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a>
+parameter is called <em>*AS ROOT*</em> - to allow the new UNIX password to be
+set without access to the old UNIX password (as the SMB password has
+change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the
+new). By default this is set to <code>"false"</code>.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>"passwd
+chat"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> unix password sync = False</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> unix password sync = True</code>
+<p><br><a name="unixrealname"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>unix realname (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter when set causes samba to supply the real name
+field from the unix password file to the client. This is useful for
+setting up mail clients and WWW browsers on systems used by more than
+one person.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> unix realname = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> unix realname = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="updateencrypted"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>update encrypted (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext
+password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd
+file to be updated automatically as they log on. This option allows a
+site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users
+authenticate with plaintext password over the wire, and are checked
+against a UNIX account database) to encrypted password authentication
+(the SMB challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing
+all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the
+change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over
+to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users
+have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd
+file this parameter should be set to <code>"off"</code>.
+<p><br>In order for this parameter to work correctly the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypt
+passwords"</strong></a> parameter must be set to <code>"no"</code> when
+this parameter is set to <code>"yes"</code>.
+<p><br>Note that even when this parameter is set a user authenticating to
+smbd must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly,
+and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) passwords.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> update encrypted = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> update encrypted = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="userhosts"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>use rhosts (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>If this global parameter is a true, it specifies that the UNIX users
+<code>".rhosts"</code> file in their home directory will be read to find the
+names of hosts and users who will be allowed access without specifying
+a password.
+<p><br>NOTE: The use of <strong>use rhosts</strong> can be a major security hole. This is
+because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is
+very easy to get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the
+<strong>use rhosts</strong> option be only used if you really know what you are
+doing.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> use rhosts = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> use rhosts = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="user"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>user (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#username"><strong>"username"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="users"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>users (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#username"><strong>"username"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="username"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>username (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which
+case the supplied password will be tested against each username in
+turn (left to right).
+<p><br>The <strong>username=</strong> line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply
+its own username. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where
+your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames. In both
+these cases you may also be better using the <code>\\server\share%user</code>
+syntax instead.
+<p><br>The <strong>username=</strong> line is not a great solution in many cases as it
+means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of
+the usernames in the username= line in turn. This is slow and a bad
+idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. You may get
+timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely.
+<p><br>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This parameter does not
+restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to
+what usernames might correspond to the supplied password. Users can
+login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more
+damage than if they started a telnet session. The daemon runs as the
+user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot
+do.
+<p><br>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#validusers"><strong>"valid users="</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br>If any of the usernames begin with a <code>'@'</code> then the name will be
+looked up first in the yp netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with
+netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database
+and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.
+<p><br>If any of the usernames begin with a <code>'+'</code> then the name will be
+looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list
+of all users in the group of that name.
+<p><br>If any of the usernames begin with a <code>'&amp;'</code> then the name will be
+looked up only in the yp netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with
+netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the
+netgroup group of that name.
+<p><br>Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time,
+and some clients may time out during the search.
+<p><br>See the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD
+VALIDATION"</strong></a> for more
+information on how this parameter determines access to the services.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> The guest account if a guest service, else the name of the service.</code>
+<p><br><strong>Examples:</strong>
+<pre>
+
+ username = fred
+ username = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><a name="usernamelevel"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>username level (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username,
+as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba
+tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter
+capitalized, and fails if the username is not found on the UNIX
+machine.
+<p><br>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behaviour changes. This
+parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
+combinations to try whilst trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
+higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower
+the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have
+strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <code>"AstrangeUser"</code>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> username level = 0</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> username level = 5</code>
+<p><br><a name="usernamemap"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>username map (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This option allows you to to specify a file containing a mapping of
+usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several
+purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or
+Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The other is to map
+multiple users to a single username so that they can more easily share
+files.
+<p><br>The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should contain a single
+UNIX username on the left then a <code>'='</code> followed by a list of
+usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the right may contain
+names of the form @group in which case they will match any UNIX
+username in that group. The special client name <code>'*'</code> is a wildcard
+and matches any name. Each line of the map file may be up to 1023
+characters long.
+<p><br>The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and
+comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the <code>'='</code>
+signs. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the right hand
+side then it is replaced with the name on the left. Processing then
+continues with the next line.
+<p><br>If any line begins with a <code>'#'</code> or a <code>';'</code> then it is ignored
+<p><br>If any line begins with an <code>'!'</code> then the processing will stop after
+that line if a mapping was done by the line. Otherwise mapping
+continues with every line being processed. Using <code>'!'</code> is most
+useful when you have a wildcard mapping line later in the file.
+<p><br>For example to map from the name <code>"admin"</code> or <code>"administrator"</code> to
+the UNIX name <code>"root"</code> you would use:
+<p><br><code> root = admin administrator</code>
+<p><br>Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <code>"system"</code> to the UNIX name
+<code>"sys"</code> you would use:
+<p><br><code> sys = @system</code>
+<p><br>You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file.
+<p><br>If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup
+database is checked before the <code>/etc/group</code> database for matching
+groups.
+<p><br>You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using double
+quotes around the name. For example:
+<p><br><code> tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</code>
+<p><br>would map the windows username <code>"Andrew Tridgell"</code> to the unix
+username tridge.
+<p><br>The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys,
+and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the <code>'!'</code> to tell Samba
+to stop processing if it gets a match on that line.
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ !sys = mary fred
+ guest = *
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of
+usernames. Thus if you connect to <code>"\\server\fred"</code> and <code>"fred"</code>
+is remapped to <code>"mary"</code> then you will actually be connecting to
+<code>"\\server\mary"</code> and will need to supply a password suitable for
+<code>"mary"</code> not <code>"fred"</code>. The only exception to this is the username
+passed to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>"password server"</strong></a> (if you have
+one). The password server will receive whatever username the client
+supplies without modification.
+<p><br>Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is
+with printing. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting
+print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the
+print job.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> no username map</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map</code>
+<p><br><a name="validchars"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>valid chars (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>The option allows you to specify additional characters that should be
+considered valid by the server in filenames. This is particularly
+useful for national character sets, such as adding u-umlaut or a-ring.
+<p><br>The option takes a list of characters in either integer or character
+form with spaces between them. If you give two characters with a colon
+between them then it will be taken as an lowercase:uppercase pair.
+<p><br>If you have an editor capable of entering the characters into the
+config file then it is probably easiest to use this method. Otherwise
+you can specify the characters in octal, decimal or hexadecimal form
+using the usual C notation.
+<p><br>For example to add the single character <code>'Z'</code> to the charset (which
+is a pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could do one of
+the following
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ valid chars = Z
+ valid chars = z:Z
+ valid chars = 0132:0172
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>The last two examples above actually add two characters, and alter the
+uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately.
+<p><br>Note that you MUST specify this parameter after the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client
+code page"</strong></a> parameter if you have both set. If
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code page"</strong></a> is set after the
+<strong>"valid chars"</strong> parameter the <strong>"valid chars"</strong> settings will be
+overwritten.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code page"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<pre>
+
+ Samba defaults to using a reasonable set of valid characters
+ for english systems
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><strong>Example</strong>
+<code> valid chars = 0345:0305 0366:0326 0344:0304</code>
+<p><br>The above example allows filenames to have the swedish characters in
+them.
+<p><br>NOTE: It is actually quite difficult to correctly produce a <strong>"valid
+chars"</strong> line for a particular system. To automate the process
+<a href="mailto:tino@augsburg.net"><em>tino@augsburg.net</em></a> has written a package called <strong>"validchars"</strong>
+which will automatically produce a complete <strong>"valid chars"</strong> line for
+a given client system. Look in the examples/validchars/ subdirectory
+of your Samba source code distribution for this package.
+<p><br><a name="validusers"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>valid users (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this
+service. Names starting with <code>'@'</code>, <code>'+'</code> and <code>'&amp;'</code> are
+interpreted using the same rules as described in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid
+users"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br>If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. If a username
+is in both this list and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a>
+list then access is denied for that user.
+<p><br>The current servicename is substituted for
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>"%S"</strong></a>. This is useful in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> section.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> No valid users list. (anyone can login)</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> valid users = greg, @pcusers</code>
+<p><br><a name="vetofiles"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>veto files(S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor
+accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a <code>'/'</code>,
+which allows spaces to be included in the entry. <code>'*'</code> and <code>'?'</code>
+can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS
+wildcards.
+<p><br>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must <em>*not*</em> include the
+unix directory separator <code>'/'</code>.
+<p><br>Note that the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case sensitive"</strong></a> option is
+applicable in vetoing files.
+<p><br>One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be
+aware of, is that if a directory contains nothing but files that match
+the veto files parameter (which means that Windows/DOS clients cannot
+ever see them) is deleted, the veto files within that directory *are
+automatically deleted* along with it, if the user has UNIX permissions
+to do so.
+<p><br>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it
+will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they
+are scanned.
+<p><br>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidefiles"><strong>"hide files"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case
+sensitive"</strong></a>.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> No files or directories are vetoed.</code>
+<p><br><strong>Examples:</strong>
+<p><br>Example 1.
+<p><br><pre>
+
+
+ Veto any files containing the word Security,
+ any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
+ word root.
+
+ veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>Example 2.
+<p><br><pre>
+
+ Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
+ creates.
+
+ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><a name="vetooplockfiles"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>veto oplock files (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter is only valid when the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>"oplocks"</strong></a>
+parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator
+to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that
+match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>"veto files"</strong></a> parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> No files are vetoed for oplock grants.</code>
+<p><br><strong>Examples:</strong>
+<p><br>You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily
+contended for by clients. A good example of this is in the NetBench
+SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy client contention for files
+ending in <code>".SEM"</code>. To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these
+files you would use the line (either in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a>
+section or in the section for the particular NetBench share :
+<p><br><code> veto oplock files = /*.SEM/</code>
+<p><br><a name="volume"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>volume (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This allows you to override the volume label returned for a
+share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a
+particular volume label.
+<p><br>The default is the name of the share.
+<p><br><a name="widelinks"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>wide links (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system
+may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the
+directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this
+parameter controls access only to areas that are outside the directory
+tree being exported.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> wide links = yes</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> wide links = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="winsproxy"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>wins proxy (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a boolean that controls if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will
+respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may
+need to set this to <code>"yes"</code> for some older clients.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> wins proxy = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="winsserver"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>wins server (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This specifies the DNS name (or IP address) of the WINS server that
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> should register with. If you have a WINS
+server on your network then you should set this to the WINS servers
+name.
+<p><br>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
+multi-subnetted network.
+<p><br><em>NOTE</em>. You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you
+have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work correctly.
+<p><br>See the documentation file BROWSING.txt in the docs/ directory of your
+Samba source distribution.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> wins server = </code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> wins server = 192.9.200.1</code>
+<p><br><a name="winssupport"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>wins support (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This boolean controls if the <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> process in
+Samba will act as a WINS server. You should not set this to true
+unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to be your WINS server. Note that you
+should <em>*NEVER*</em> set this to true on more than one machine in your
+network.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> wins support = no</code>
+<p><br><a name="workgroup"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>workgroup (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when
+queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controlls the Domain
+name used with the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>
+setting.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> set at compile time to WORKGROUP</code>
+<p><br>.B Example:
+ workgroup = MYGROUP
+<p><br><a name="writable"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>writable (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>An inverted synonym is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>"read only"</strong></a>.
+<p><br>If this parameter is <code>"no"</code>, then users of a service may not create
+or modify files in the service's directory.
+<p><br>Note that a printable service <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printable"><strong>("printable = yes")</strong></a>
+will <em>*ALWAYS*</em> allow writing to the directory (user privileges
+permitting), but only via spooling operations.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> writable = no</code>
+<p><br><strong>Examples:</strong>
+<pre>
+
+ read only = no
+ writable = yes
+ write ok = yes
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br><a name="writelist"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>write list (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a
+service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be
+given write access, no matter what the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>"read only"</strong></a>
+option is set to. The list can include group names using the @group
+syntax.
+<p><br>Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then
+they will be given write access.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readlist"><strong>"read list"</strong></a> option.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> write list = &lt;empty string&gt;</code>
+<p><br><strong>Example:</strong>
+<code> write list = admin, root, @staff</code>
+<p><br><a name="writeok"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>write ok (S)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writable"><strong>writable</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="writeraw"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>write raw (G)</strong></strong>
+<p><br>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw
+writes SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never
+need to change this parameter.
+<p><br><strong>Default:</strong>
+<code> write raw = yes</code>
+<p><br><a name="writeable"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>writeable</strong></strong>
+<p><br>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writable"><strong>"writable"</strong></a> for people who can't spell :-).
+<p><br><a name="WARNINGS"></a>
+<h2>WARNINGS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Although the configuration file permits service names to contain
+spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in
+comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the
+possibility.
+<p><br>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit
+service names to eight characters. <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>Smbd</strong></a> has no
+such limitation, but attempts to connect from such clients will fail
+if they truncate the service names. For this reason you should
+probably keep your service names down to eight characters in length.
+<p><br>Use of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a>
+special sections make life for an administrator easy, but the various
+combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care
+when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the
+permissions on spool directories are correct.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient (1)</strong></a>,
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm (1)</strong></a>,
+<a href="testprns.1.html"><strong>testprns (1)</strong></a>, <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>Samba</strong></a>,
+<a href="nmblookup.1.html"><strong>nmblookup (1)</strong></a>, <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a>,
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..70e87ce18e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,581 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbclient</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbclient</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbclient - ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smbclient</strong> <a href="smbclient.1.html#servicename">servicename</a> [<a href="smbclient.1.html#password">password</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minuss">-s smb.conf</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusB">-B IP addr</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusO">-O socket options</a>][<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusR">-R name resolve order</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusM">-M NetBIOS name</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusi">-i scope</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusN">-N</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusn">-n NetBIOS name</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusd">-d debuglevel</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusP">-P</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusp">-p port</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusl">-l log basename</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minush">-h</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusI">-I dest IP</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusE">-E</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusU">-U username</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusL">-L NetBIOS name</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minust">-t terminal code</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusm">-m max protocol</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusW">-W workgroup</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusT">-T&lt;c|x&gt;IXFqgbNan</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusD">-D directory</a>] [<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusc">-c command string</a>]
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>smbclient</strong> is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server. It
+offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see <strong>ftp
+(1)</strong>). Operations include things like getting files from the server
+to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the
+server, retrieving directory information from the server and so on.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="servicename"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>servicename</strong></strong> servicename is the name of the service you want
+to use on the server. A service name takes the form
+<code>//server/service</code> where <em>server</em> is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS
+server offering the desired service and <em>service</em> is the name
+of the service offered. Thus to connect to the service <em>printer</em> on
+the SMB/CIFS server <em>smbserver</em>, you would use the servicename
+<p><br><code>//smbserver/printer</code>
+<p><br>Note that the server name required is NOT necessarily the IP (DNS)
+host name of the server ! The name required is a NetBIOS server name,
+which may or may not be the same as the IP hostname of the machine
+running the server.
+<p><br>The server name is looked up according to either the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusR"><strong>-R</strong></a> parameter to <strong>smbclient</strong> or using the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>name resolve order</strong></a>
+parameter in the smb.conf file, allowing an administrator to change
+the order and methods by which server names are looked up.
+<p><br><a name="password"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>password</strong></strong> password is the password required to access the
+specified service on the specified server. If this parameter is
+supplied, the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusN"><strong>-N</strong></a> option (suppress password prompt) is assumed.
+<p><br>There is no default password. If no password is supplied on the
+command line (either by using this parameter or adding a password to
+the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusU"><strong>-U</strong></a> option (see below)) and the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusN"><strong>-N</strong></a> option is not specified,
+the client will prompt for a password, even if the desired service
+does not require one. (If no password is required, simply press ENTER
+to provide a null password.)
+<p><br>Note: Some servers (including OS/2 and Windows for Workgroups) insist
+on an uppercase password. Lowercase or mixed case passwords may be
+rejected by these servers.
+<p><br>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts.
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s smb.conf</strong></strong> This parameter specifies the pathname to the
+Samba configuration file, smb.conf. This file controls all aspects of
+the Samba setup on the machine and smbclient also needs to read this
+file.
+<p><br><a name="minusB"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-B IP addr</strong></strong> The IP address to use when sending a broadcast packet.
+<p><br><a name="minusO"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-O socket options</strong></strong> TCP socket options to set on the client
+socket. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions">socket options</a>
+parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> manpage for
+the list of valid options.
+<p><br><a name="minusR"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-R name resolve order</strong></strong> This option allows the user of
+smbclient to determine what name resolution services to use when
+looking up the NetBIOS name of the host being connected to.
+<p><br>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They cause
+names to be resolved as follows :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>lmhosts</strong> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file.
+The lmhosts file is stored in the same directory as the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><li > <strong>host</strong> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution,
+using the system /etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name
+resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or
+Solaris this may be controlled by the <em>/etc/nsswitch.conf</em> file).
+<p><br><li > <strong>wins</strong> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsserver"><strong>wins
+server</strong></a> parameter in the smb.conf file. If
+no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored.
+<p><br><li > <strong>bcast</strong> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
+listed in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a> parameter
+in the smb.conf file. This is the least reliable of the name resolution
+methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected
+subnet. To specify a particular broadcast address the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusB"><strong>-B</strong></a> option
+may be used.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>If this parameter is not set then the name resolver order defined
+in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder">(<strong>name resolve order</strong>)</a>
+will be used.
+<p><br>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast and without this
+parameter or any entry in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>"name resolve
+order"</strong></a> parameter of the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file the name resolution methods
+will be attempted in this order.
+<p><br><a name="minusM"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-M NetBIOS name</strong></strong> This options allows you to send messages,
+using the "WinPopup" protocol, to another computer. Once a connection
+is established you then type your message, pressing ^D (control-D) to
+end.
+<p><br>If the receiving computer is running WinPopup the user will receive
+the message and probably a beep. If they are not running WinPopup the
+message will be lost, and no error message will occur.
+<p><br>The message is also automatically truncated if the message is over
+1600 bytes, as this is the limit of the protocol.
+<p><br>One useful trick is to cat the message through <strong>smbclient</strong>.
+For example:
+<p><br><code>cat mymessage.txt | smbclient -M FRED</code>
+<p><br>will send the message in the file <em>mymessage.txt</em> to the machine FRED.
+<p><br>You may also find the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusU"><strong>-U</strong></a> and <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusI"><strong>-I</strong></a> options useful, as they allow
+you to control the FROM and TO parts of the message.
+<p><br>See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#messagecommand"><strong>message command</strong></a>
+parameter in the <strong>smb.conf (5)</strong> for a description of how to handle
+incoming WinPopup messages in Samba.
+<p><br>Note: Copy WinPopup into the startup group on your WfWg PCs if you
+want them to always be able to receive messages.
+<p><br><a name="minusi"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-i scope</strong></strong> This specifies a NetBIOS scope that smbclient will use
+to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the
+use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes
+are <em>very</em> rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the
+system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you
+communicate with.
+<p><br><a name="minusN"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-N</strong></strong> If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal
+password prompt from the client to the user. This is useful when
+accessing a service that does not require a password.
+<p><br>Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter
+is specified, the client will request a password.
+<p><br><a name="minusn"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-n NetBIOS name</strong></strong> By default, the client will use the local
+machine's hostname (in uppercase) as its NetBIOS name. This parameter
+allows you to override the host name and use whatever NetBIOS name you
+wish.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d debuglevel</strong></strong> debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10, or the
+letter 'A'.
+<p><br>The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero.
+<p><br>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files
+about the activities of the client. At level 0, only critical errors
+and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
+day to day running - it generates a small amount of information about
+operations carried out.
+<p><br>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and
+should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are
+designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic. If debuglevel is set to the
+letter 'A', then <em>all</em> debug messages will be printed. This setting
+is for developers only (and people who <em>really</em> want to know how the
+code works internally).
+<p><br>Note that specifying this parameter here will override the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"><strong>log
+level</strong></a> parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="minusP"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-P</strong></strong> This option is no longer used. The code in Samba2.0
+now lets the server decide the device type, so no printer specific
+flag is needed.
+<p><br><a name="minusp"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-p port</strong></strong> This number is the TCP port number that will be used
+when making connections to the server. The standard (well-known) TCP
+port number for an SMB/CIFS server is 139, which is the default.
+<p><br><a name="minusl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-l logfilename</strong></strong> If specified, logfilename specifies a base
+filename into which operational data from the running client will be
+logged.
+<p><br>The default base name is specified at compile time.
+<p><br>The base name is used to generate actual log file names. For example,
+if the name specified was "log", the debug file would be
+<code>log.client</code>.
+<p><br>The log file generated is never removed by the client.
+<p><br><a name="minush"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-h</strong></strong> Print the usage message for the client.
+<p><br><a name="minusI"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-I IP address</strong></strong> IP address is the address of the server to
+connect to. It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation.
+<p><br>Normally the client would attempt to locate a named SMB/CIFS server by
+looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution mechanism described
+above in the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusR"><strong>name resolve order</strong></a> parameter
+above. Using this parameter will force the client to assume that the
+server is on the machine with the specified IP address and the NetBIOS
+name component of the resource being connected to will be ignored.
+<p><br>There is no default for this parameter. If not supplied, it will be
+determined automatically by the client as described above.
+<p><br><a name="minusE"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-E</strong></strong> This parameter causes the client to write messages to the
+standard error stream (stderr) rather than to the standard output
+stream.
+<p><br>By default, the client writes messages to standard output - typically
+the user's tty.
+<p><br><a name="minusU"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-U username</strong></strong> This specifies the user name that will be used by
+the client to make a connection, assuming your server is not a downlevel
+server that is running a protocol level that uses passwords on shares,
+not on usernames.
+<p><br>Some servers are fussy about the case of this name, and some insist
+that it must be a valid NetBIOS name.
+<p><br>If no username is supplied, it will default to an uppercase version of
+the environment variable <code>USER</code> or <code>LOGNAME</code> in that order. If no
+username is supplied and neither environment variable exists the
+username "GUEST" will be used.
+<p><br>If the <code>USER</code> environment variable containts a '%' character,
+everything after that will be treated as a password. This allows you
+to set the environment variable to be <code>USER=username%password</code> so
+that a password is not passed on the command line (where it may be
+seen by the ps command).
+<p><br>If the service you are connecting to requires a password, it can be
+supplied using the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusU"><strong>-U</strong></a> option, by appending a percent symbol ("%")
+then the password to username. For example, to attach to a service as
+user <code>"fred"</code> with password <code>"secret"</code>, you would specify. <br>
+<p><br><code>-U fred%secret</code> <br>
+<p><br>on the command line. Note that there are no spaces around the percent
+symbol.
+<p><br>If you specify the password as part of username then the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusN"><strong>-N</strong></a> option
+(suppress password prompt) is assumed.
+<p><br>If you specify the password as a parameter <em>AND</em> as part of username
+then the password as part of username will take precedence. Putting
+nothing before or nothing after the percent symbol will cause an empty
+username or an empty password to be used, respectively.
+<p><br>The password may also be specified by setting up an environment
+variable called <code>PASSWORD</code> that contains the users password. Note
+that this may be very insecure on some systems but on others allows
+users to script smbclient commands without having a password appear in
+the command line of a process listing.
+<p><br>Note: Some servers (including OS/2 and Windows for Workgroups) insist
+on an uppercase password. Lowercase or mixed case passwords may be
+rejected by these servers.
+<p><br>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts or in the
+<code>PASSWORD</code> environment variable. Also, on many systems the command
+line of a running process may be seen via the <code>ps</code> command to be
+safe always allow smbclient to prompt for a password and type it in
+directly.
+<p><br><a name="minusL"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-L</strong></strong> This option allows you to look at what services are
+available on a server. You use it as <code>"smbclient -L host"</code> and a
+list should appear. The <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusI"><strong>-I</strong></a> option may be useful if your NetBIOS
+names don't match your tcp/ip dns host names or if you are trying to
+reach a host on another network.
+<p><br><a name="minust"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-t terminal code</strong></strong> This option tells smbclient how to interpret
+filenames coming from the remote server. Usually Asian language
+multibyte UNIX implementations use different character sets than
+SMB/CIFS servers (<em>EUC</em> instead of <em>SJIS</em> for example). Setting
+this parameter will let smbclient convert between the UNIX filenames
+and the SMB filenames correctly. This option has not been seriously
+tested and may have some problems.
+<p><br>The terminal codes include <code>sjis</code>, <code>euc</code>, <code>jis7</code>, <code>jis8</code>,
+<code>junet</code>, <code>hex</code>, <code>cap</code>. This is not a complete list, check the
+Samba source code for the complete list.
+<p><br><a name="minusm"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-m max protocol level</strong></strong> With the new code in Samba2.0,
+<strong>smbclient</strong> allways attempts to connect at the maximum
+protocols level the server supports. This parameter is
+preserved for backwards compatibility, but any string
+following the <strong>-m</strong> will be ignored.
+<p><br><a name="minusW"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-W WORKGROUP</strong></strong> Override the default workgroup specified in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> parameter of the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file for this connection. This may
+be needed to connect to some servers.
+<p><br><a name="minusT"></a> <li><strong><strong>-T tar options</strong></strong> smbclient may be used to create
+<strong>tar (1)</strong> compatible backups of all the files on an SMB/CIFS
+share. The secondary tar flags that can be given to this option are :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>c</strong></strong> Create a tar file on UNIX. Must be followed by the
+ name of a tar file, tape device or <code>"-"</code> for standard output. If
+ using standard output you must turn the log level to its lowest value
+ <code>-d0</code> to avoid corrupting your tar file. This flag is
+ mutually exclusive with the <strong>x</strong> flag.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>x</strong></strong> Extract (restore) a local tar file back to a
+ share. Unless the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusD"><strong>-D</strong></a> option is given, the tar files will be
+ restored from the top level of the share. Must be followed by the name
+ of the tar file, device or <code>"-"</code> for standard input. Mutually exclusive
+ with the <strong>c</strong> flag. Restored files have theuir creation times (mtime)
+ set to the date saved in the tar file. Directories currently do not
+ get their creation dates restored properly.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>I</strong></strong> Include files and directories. Is the default
+ behaviour when filenames are specified above. Causes tar files to
+ be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to
+ be excluded). See example below. Filename globbing does not work for
+ included files for extractions (yet).
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>X</strong></strong> Exclude files and directories. Causes tar files to
+ be excluded from an extract or create. See example below. Filename
+ globbing does not work for excluded files (yet).
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>b</strong></strong> Blocksize. Must be followed by a valid (greater than
+ zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to be written out in
+ blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>g</strong></strong> Incremental. Only back up files that have the
+ archive bit set. Useful only with the <strong>c</strong> flag.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>q</strong></strong> Quiet. Keeps tar from printing diagnostics as it
+ works. This is the same as tarmode quiet.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>N</strong></strong> Newer than. Must be followed by the name of a file
+ whose date is compared against files found on the share during a
+ create. Only files newer than the file specified are backed up to the
+ tar file. Useful only with the <strong>c</strong> flag.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>a</strong></strong> Set archive bit. Causes the archive bit to be reset
+ when a file is backed up. Useful with the <strong>g</strong> and <strong>c</strong> flags.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><em>Tar Long File Names</em>
+<p><br>smbclient's tar option now supports long file names both on backup and
+restore. However, the full path name of the file must be less than
+1024 bytes. Also, when a tar archive is created, smbclient's tar
+option places all files in the archive with relative names, not
+absolute names.
+<p><br><em>Tar Filenames</em>
+<p><br>All file names can be given as DOS path names (with <code>\</code> as the
+component separator) or as UNIX path names (with <code>/</code> as the
+component separator).
+<p><br><em>Examples</em>
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > Restore from tar file backup.tar into myshare on mypc (no password on share).
+<p><br><code>smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tx backup.tar</code>
+<p><br><li > Restore everything except users/docs
+<p><br><code>smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -TXx backup.tar users/docs</code>
+<p><br><li > Create a tar file of the files beneath users/docs.
+<p><br><code>smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar users/docs</code>
+<p><br><li > Create the same tar file as above, but now use a DOS path name.
+<p><br><code>smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -tc backup.tar users\edocs</code>
+<p><br><li > Create a tar file of all the files and directories in the share.
+<p><br><code>smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar *</code>
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="minusD"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-D initial directory</strong></strong> Change to initial directory before
+starting. Probably only of any use with the tar <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusT"><strong>-T</strong></a> option.
+<p><br><a name="minusc"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-c command string</strong></strong> command string is a semicolon separated
+list of commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin.
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusN"><strong>-N</strong></a> is implied by <strong>-c</strong>.
+<p><br>This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin to the
+server, e.g. <code>-c 'print -'</code>.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="OPERATIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPERATIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Once the client is running, the user is presented with a prompt :
+<p><br><code>smb:\&gt;</code>
+<p><br>The backslash ("\") indicates the current working directory on the
+server, and will change if the current working directory is changed.
+<p><br>The prompt indicates that the client is ready and waiting to carry out
+a user command. Each command is a single word, optionally followed by
+parameters specific to that command. Command and parameters are
+space-delimited unless these notes specifically state otherwise. All
+commands are case-insensitive. Parameters to commands may or may not
+be case sensitive, depending on the command.
+<p><br>You can specify file names which have spaces in them by quoting the
+name with double quotes, for example "a long file name".
+<p><br>Parameters shown in square brackets (eg., "[parameter]") are
+optional. If not given, the command will use suitable
+defaults. Parameters shown in angle brackets (eg., "&lt;parameter&gt;") are
+required.
+<p><br>Note that all commands operating on the server are actually performed
+by issuing a request to the server. Thus the behaviour may vary from
+server to server, depending on how the server was implemented.
+<p><br>The commands available are given here in alphabetical order.
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="questionmark"></a> <li><strong><strong>? [command]</strong></strong> If "command" is specified,
+the <strong>?</strong> command will display a brief informative message about the
+specified command. If no command is specified, a list of available
+commands will be displayed.
+<p><br><a name="exclaimationmark"></a> <li><strong><strong>! [shell command]</strong></strong> If "shell command"
+is specified, the <strong>!</strong> command will execute a shell locally and run
+the specified shell command. If no command is specified, a local shell
+will be run.
+<p><br><a name="cd"></a> <li><strong><strong>cd [directory name]</strong></strong> If "directory name" is
+specified, the current working directory on the server will be changed
+to the directory specified. This operation will fail if for any reason
+the specified directory is inaccessible.
+<p><br>If no directory name is specified, the current working directory on
+the server will be reported.
+<p><br><a name="del"></a> <li><strong><strong>del &lt;mask&gt;</strong></strong> The client will request that the server
+attempt to delete all files matching "mask" from the current working
+directory on the server.
+<p><br><a name="dir"></a> <li><strong><strong>dir &lt;mask&gt;</strong></strong> A list of the files matching "mask" in
+the current working directory on the server will be retrieved from the
+server and displayed.
+<p><br><a name="exit"></a> <li><strong><strong>exit</strong></strong> Terminate the connection with the server and
+exit from the program.
+<p><br><a name="get"></a> <li><strong><strong>get &lt;remote file name&gt; [local file name]</strong></strong> Copy the
+file called "remote file name" from the server to the machine running
+the client. If specified, name the local copy "local file name". Note
+that all transfers in smbclient are binary. See also the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#lowercase"><strong>lowercase</strong></a> command.
+<p><br><a name="help"></a> <li><strong><strong>help [command]</strong></strong> See the <a href="smbclient.1.html#questionmark"><strong>?</strong></a>
+command above.
+<p><br><a name="lcd"></a> <li><strong><strong>lcd [directory name]</strong></strong> If "directory name" is
+specified, the current working directory on the local machine will
+be changed to the directory specified. This operation will fail if for
+any reason the specified directory is inaccessible.
+<p><br>If no directory name is specified, the name of the current working
+directory on the local machine will be reported.
+<p><br><a name="lowercase"></a> <li><strong><strong>lowercase</strong></strong> Toggle lowercasing of filenames
+for the <a href="smbclient.1.html#get"><strong>get</strong></a> and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> commands.
+<p><br>When lowercasing is toggled ON, local filenames are converted to
+lowercase when using the <a href="smbclient.1.html#get"><strong>get</strong></a> and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a>
+commands. This is often useful when copying (say) MSDOS files from a
+server, because lowercase filenames are the norm on UNIX systems.
+<p><br><a name="ls"></a> <li><strong><strong>ls &lt;mask&gt;</strong></strong> See the <a href="smbclient.1.html#dir"><strong>dir</strong></a> command above.
+<p><br><a name="mask"></a> <li><strong><strong>mask &lt;mask&gt;</strong></strong> This command allows the user to set
+up a mask which will be used during recursive operation of the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mput"><strong>mput</strong></a> commands.
+<p><br>The masks specified to the <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> and
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#mput"><strong>mput</strong></a> commands act as filters for directories rather
+than files when recursion is toggled ON.
+<p><br>The mask specified with the .B mask command is necessary to filter
+files within those directories. For example, if the mask specified in
+an <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> command is "source*" and the mask specified
+with the mask command is "*.c" and recursion is toggled ON, the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> command will retrieve all files matching "*.c" in
+all directories below and including all directories matching "source*"
+in the current working directory.
+<p><br>Note that the value for mask defaults to blank (equivalent to "*") and
+remains so until the mask command is used to change it. It retains the
+most recently specified value indefinitely. To avoid unexpected
+results it would be wise to change the value of .I mask back to "*"
+after using the <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> or <a href="smbclient.1.html#mput"><strong>mput</strong></a> commands.
+<p><br><a name="md"></a> <li><strong><strong>md &lt;directory name&gt;</strong></strong> See the <a href="smbclient.1.html#mkdir"><strong>mkdir</strong></a>
+command.
+<p><br><a name="mget"></a> <li><strong><strong>mget &lt;mask&gt;</strong></strong> Copy all files matching mask from the
+server to the machine running the client.
+<p><br>Note that mask is interpreted differently during recursive operation
+and non-recursive operation - refer to the <a href="smbclient.1.html#recurse"><strong>recurse</strong></a>
+and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mask"><strong>mask</strong></a> commands for more information. Note that all
+transfers in .B smbclient are binary. See also the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#lowercase"><strong>lowercase</strong></a> command.
+<p><br><a name="mkdir"></a> <li><strong><strong>mkdir &lt;directory name&gt;</strong></strong> Create a new directory on
+the server (user access privileges permitting) with the specified
+name.
+<p><br><a name="mput"></a> <li><strong><strong>mput &lt;mask&gt;</strong></strong> Copy all files matching mask in
+the current working directory on the local machine to the current
+working directory on the server.
+<p><br>Note that mask is interpreted differently during recursive operation
+and non-recursive operation - refer to the <a href="smbclient.1.html#recurse"><strong>recurse</strong></a>
+and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mask"><strong>mask</strong></a> commands for more information. Note that all
+transfers in .B smbclient are binary.
+<p><br><a name="print"></a> <li><strong><strong>print &lt;file name&gt;</strong></strong> Print the specified file
+from the local machine through a printable service on the server.
+<p><br>See also the <a href="smbclient.1.html#printmode"><strong>printmode</strong></a> command.
+<p><br><a name="printmode"></a> <li><strong><strong>printmode &lt;graphics or text&gt;</strong></strong> Set the print
+mode to suit either binary data (such as graphical information) or
+text. Subsequent print commands will use the currently set print
+mode.
+<p><br><a name="prompt"></a> dir(<strong>prompt</strong>) Toggle prompting for filenames during
+operation of the <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mput"><strong>mput</strong></a>
+commands.
+<p><br>When toggled ON, the user will be prompted to confirm the transfer of
+each file during these commands. When toggled OFF, all specified files
+will be transferred without prompting.
+<p><br><a name="put"></a> <li><strong><strong>put &lt;local file name&gt; [remote file name]</strong></strong> Copy the
+file called "local file name" from the machine running the client to
+the server. If specified, name the remote copy "remote file name".
+Note that all transfers in smbclient are binary. See also the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#lowercase"><strong>lowercase</strong></a> command.
+<p><br><a name="queue"></a> dir(<strong>queue</strong>) Displays the print queue, showing the job
+id, name, size and current status.
+<p><br><a name="quit"></a> <li><strong><strong>quit</strong></strong> See the <a href="smbclient.1.html#exit"><strong>exit</strong></a> command.
+<p><br><a name="rd"></a> dir(<strong>rd &lt;directory name&gt;</strong>) See the <a href="smbclient.1.html#rmdir"><strong>rmdir</strong></a>
+command.
+<p><br><a name="recurse"></a> dir(<strong>recurse</strong>) Toggle directory recursion for the
+commands <a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> and <a href="smbclient.1.html#mput"><strong>mput</strong></a>.
+<p><br>When toggled ON, these commands will process all directories in the
+source directory (i.e., the directory they are copying .IR from ) and
+will recurse into any that match the mask specified to the
+command. Only files that match the mask specified using the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#mask"><strong>mask</strong></a> command will be retrieved. See also the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#mask"><strong>mask</strong></a> command.
+<p><br>When recursion is toggled OFF, only files from the current working
+directory on the source machine that match the mask specified to the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#mget"><strong>mget</strong></a> or <a href="smbclient.1.html#mput"><strong>mput</strong></a> commands will be copied,
+and any mask specified using the <a href="smbclient.1.html#mask"><strong>mask</strong></a> command will be
+ignored.
+<p><br><a name="rm"></a> dir(<strong>rm &lt;mask&gt;</strong>) Remove all files matching mask from
+the current working directory on the server.
+<p><br><a name="rmdir"></a> <li><strong><strong>rmdir &lt;directory name&gt;</strong></strong> Remove the specified
+directory (user access privileges permitting) from the server.
+<p><br><a name="tar"></a> <li><strong><strong>tar &lt;c|x&gt;[IXbgNa]</strong></strong> Performs a tar operation - see
+the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusT"><strong>-T</strong></a> command line option above. Behaviour may be
+affected by the <a href="smbclient.1.html#tarmode"><strong>tarmode</strong></a> command (see below). Using
+g (incremental) and N (newer) will affect tarmode settings. Note that
+using the "-" option with tar x may not work - use the command line
+option instead.
+<p><br><a name="blocksize"></a> <li><strong><strong>blocksize &lt;blocksize&gt;</strong></strong> Blocksize. Must be
+followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to
+be written out in blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks.
+<p><br><a name="tarmode"></a> dir(<strong>tarmode &lt;full|inc|reset|noreset&gt;</strong>) Changes tar's
+behaviour with regard to archive bits. In full mode, tar will back up
+everything regardless of the archive bit setting (this is the default
+mode). In incremental mode, tar will only back up files with the
+archive bit set. In reset mode, tar will reset the archive bit on all
+files it backs up (implies read/write share).
+<p><br><a name="setmode"></a> <li><strong><strong>setmode &lt;filename&gt; &lt;perm=[+|\-]rsha&gt;</strong></strong> A version
+of the DOS attrib command to set file permissions. For example:
+<p><br><code>setmode myfile +r</code>
+<p><br>would make myfile read only.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="NOTES"></a>
+<h2>NOTES</h2>
+
+<p><br>Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames,
+passwords, share names (aka service names) and machine names. If you
+fail to connect try giving all parameters in uppercase.
+<p><br>It is often necessary to use the <a href="smbclient.1.html#minusn"><strong>-n</strong></a> option when connecting to some
+types of servers. For example OS/2 LanManager insists on a valid
+NetBIOS name being used, so you need to supply a valid name that would
+be known to the server.
+<p><br>smbclient supports long file names where the server supports the
+LANMAN2 protocol or above.
+<p><br><a name="ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES"></a>
+<h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2>
+
+<p><br>The variable <strong>USER</strong> may contain the username of the person using the
+client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high
+enough to support session-level passwords.
+<p><br>The variable <strong>PASSWORD</strong> may contain the password of the person using
+the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is
+high enough to support session-level passwords.
+<p><br><a name="INSTALLATION"></a>
+<h2>INSTALLATION</h2>
+
+<p><br>The location of the client program is a matter for individual system
+administrators. The following are thus suggestions only.
+<p><br>It is recommended that the smbclient software be installed in the
+/usr/local/samba/bin or /usr/samba/bin directory, this directory
+readable by all, writeable only by root. The client program itself
+should be executable by all. The client should <em>NOT</em> be setuid or
+setgid!
+<p><br>The client log files should be put in a directory readable and
+writable only by the user.
+<p><br>To test the client, you will need to know the name of a running
+SMB/CIFS server. It is possible to run <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>
+an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a
+user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) would
+provide a suitable test server.
+<p><br><a name="DIAGNOSTICS"></a>
+<h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a specified log
+file. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be
+overridden on the command line.
+<p><br>The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug
+level used by the client. If you have problems, set the debug level to
+3 and peruse the log files.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..819fc39445
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html
@@ -0,0 +1,376 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbd</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbd</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbd - server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smbd</strong> [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusD">-D</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusa">-a</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minuso">-o</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusd">-d debuglevel</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusl">-l log file</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusp">-p port number</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusO">-O socket options</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minuss">-s configuration file</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusi">-i scope</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minusP">-P</a>] [<a href="smbd.8.html#minush">-h</a>]
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>smbd</strong> is the server daemon that provides filesharing services to
+Windows clients. The server provides filespace and printer services to
+clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol. This is compatible with the
+LanManager protocol, and can service LanManager clients. These
+include MSCLIENT 3.0 for DOS, Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95,
+Windows NT, OS/2, DAVE for Macintosh, and smbfs for Linux.
+<p><br>An extensive description of the services that the server can provide
+is given in the man page for the configuration file controlling the
+attributes of those services (see <strong>smb.conf (5)</strong>). This man page
+will not describe the services, but will concentrate on the
+administrative aspects of running the server.
+<p><br>Please note that there are significant security implications to
+running this server, and the <strong>smb.conf (5)</strong> manpage should be
+regarded as mandatory reading before proceeding with installation.
+<p><br>A session is created whenever a client requests one. Each client gets
+a copy of the server for each session. This copy then services all
+connections made by the client during that session. When all
+connections from its client are are closed, the copy of the server for
+that client terminates.
+<p><br>The configuration file, and any files that it includes, are
+automatically reloaded every minute, if they change. You can force a
+reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server. Reloading the configuration
+file will not affect connections to any service that is already
+established. Either the user will have to disconnect from the
+service, or smbd killed and restarted.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="minusD"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-D</strong></strong> If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a
+daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background,
+fielding requests on the appropriate port. Operating the server as a
+daemon is the recommended way of running smbd for servers that provide
+more than casual use file and print services.
+<p><br>By default, the server will NOT operate as a daemon.
+<p><br><a name="minusa"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-a</strong></strong> If this parameter is specified, each new connection will
+append log messages to the log file. This is the default.
+<p><br><a name="minuso"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-o</strong></strong> If this parameter is specified, the log files will be
+overwritten when opened. By default, the log files will be appended
+to.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d debuglevel</strong></strong> debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.
+<p><br>The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero.
+<p><br>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files
+about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors
+and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
+day to day running - it generates a small amount of information about
+operations carried out.
+<p><br>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and
+should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are
+designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
+<p><br>Note that specifying this parameter here will override the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"><strong>log
+level</strong></a> parameter in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="minusl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-l log file</strong></strong> If specified, <em>log file</em> specifies
+a log filename into which informational and debug messages from the
+running server will be logged. The log file generated is never removed
+by the server although its size may be controlled by the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxlogsize"><strong>max
+log size</strong></a> option in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> file. The default log file name is specified
+at compile time.
+<p><br><a name="minusO"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-O socket options</strong></strong> See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"><strong>socket
+options</strong></a> parameter in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> file for details.
+<p><br><a name="minusp"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-p port number</strong></strong> port number is a positive integer value. The
+default value if this parameter is not specified is 139.
+<p><br>This number is the port number that will be used when making
+connections to the server from client software. The standard
+(well-known) port number for the SMB over TCP is 139, hence the
+default. If you wish to run the server as an ordinary user rather than
+as root, most systems will require you to use a port number greater
+than 1024 - ask your system administrator for help if you are in this
+situation.
+<p><br>In order for the server to be useful by most clients, should you
+configure it on a port other than 139, you will require port
+redirection services on port 139, details of which are outlined in
+rfc1002.txt section 4.3.5.
+<p><br>This parameter is not normally specified except in the above
+situation.
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s configuration file</strong></strong> The default configuration file name is
+determined at compile time.
+<p><br>The file specified contains the configuration details required by the
+server. The information in this file includes server-specific
+information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions
+of all the services that the server is to provide. See <strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong> for more information.
+<p><br><a name="minusi"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-i scope</strong></strong> This specifies a NetBIOS scope that the server will use
+to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the
+use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes
+are <em>very</em> rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the
+system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you
+communicate with.
+<p><br><a name="minush"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-h</strong></strong> Prints the help information (usage) for smbd.
+<p><br><a name="minusP"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-P</strong></strong> Passive option. Causes smbd not to send any network traffic
+out. Used for debugging by the developers only.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="FILES"></a>
+<h2>FILES</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>/etc/inetd.conf</strong>
+<p><br>If the server is to be run by the inetd meta-daemon, this file must
+contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon. See the
+section <em>INSTALLATION</em> below.
+<p><br><strong>/etc/rc</strong>
+<p><br>(or whatever initialisation script your system uses).
+<p><br>If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to
+contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server. See the
+section <em>INSTALLATION</em> below.
+<p><br><strong>/etc/services</strong>
+<p><br>If running the server via the meta-daemon inetd, this file must
+contain a mapping of service name (eg., netbios-ssn) to service port
+(eg., 139) and protocol type (eg., tcp). See the section
+<em>INSTALLATION</em> below.
+<p><br><strong>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</strong>
+<p><br>This is the default location of the <em>smb.conf</em> server configuration
+file. Other common places that systems install this file are
+<em>/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</em> and <em>/etc/smb.conf</em>.
+<p><br>This file describes all the services the server is to make available
+to clients. See <strong>smb.conf (5)</strong> for more information.
+<p><br><a name="LIMITATIONS"></a>
+<h2>LIMITATIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br>On some systems <strong>smbd</strong> cannot change uid back to root after a
+setuid() call. Such systems are called "trapdoor" uid systems. If you
+have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such
+as a PC) as two different users at once. Attempts to connect the
+second user will result in "access denied" or similar.
+<p><br><a name="ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES"></a>
+<h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>PRINTER</strong>
+<p><br>If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems
+will use the value of this variable (or "lp" if this variable is not
+defined) as the name of the printer to use. This is not specific to
+the server, however.
+<p><br><a name="INSTALLATION"></a>
+<h2>INSTALLATION</h2>
+
+<p><br>The location of the server and its support files is a matter for
+individual system administrators. The following are thus suggestions
+only.
+<p><br>It is recommended that the server software be installed under the
+/usr/local/samba hierarchy, in a directory readable by all, writeable
+only by root. The server program itself should be executable by all,
+as users may wish to run the server themselves (in which case it will
+of course run with their privileges). The server should NOT be
+setuid. On some systems it may be worthwhile to make smbd setgid to an
+empty group. This is because some systems may have a security hole
+where daemon processes that become a user can be attached to with a
+debugger. Making the smbd file setgid to an empty group may prevent
+this hole from being exploited. This security hole and the suggested
+fix has only been confirmed on old versions (pre-kernel 2.0) of Linux
+at the time this was written. It is possible that this hole only
+exists in Linux, as testing on other systems has thus far shown them
+to be immune.
+<p><br>The server log files should be put in a directory readable and
+writable only by root, as the log files may contain sensitive
+information.
+<p><br>The configuration file should be placed in a directory readable and
+writable only by root, as the configuration file controls security for
+the services offered by the server. The configuration file can be made
+readable by all if desired, but this is not necessary for correct
+operation of the server and is not recommended. A sample configuration
+file "smb.conf.sample" is supplied with the source to the server -
+this may be renamed to "smb.conf" and modified to suit your needs.
+<p><br>The remaining notes will assume the following:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><li > <strong>smbd</strong> (the server program) installed in /usr/local/samba/bin
+<p><br><li > <strong>smb.conf</strong> (the configuration file) installed in /usr/local/samba/lib
+<p><br><li > log files stored in /var/adm/smblogs
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>The server may be run either as a daemon by users or at startup, or it
+may be run from a meta-daemon such as inetd upon request. If run as a
+daemon, the server will always be ready, so starting sessions will be
+faster. If run from a meta-daemon some memory will be saved and
+utilities such as the tcpd TCP-wrapper may be used for extra security.
+For serious use as file server it is recommended that <strong>smbd</strong> be run
+as a daemon.
+<p><br>When you've decided, continue with either <em>RUNNING THE SERVER AS A
+DAEMON</em> or <em>RUNNING THE SERVER ON REQUEST</em>.
+<p><br><a name="RUNNINGTHESERVERASADAEMON"></a>
+<h2>RUNNING THE SERVER AS A DAEMON</h2>
+
+<p><br>To run the server as a daemon from the command line, simply put the
+<a href="smbd.8.html#minusD"><strong>-D</strong></a> option on the command line. There is no need to place an
+ampersand at the end of the command line - the <a href="smbd.8.html#minusD"><strong>-D</strong></a> option causes
+the server to detach itself from the tty anyway.
+<p><br>Any user can run the server as a daemon (execute permissions
+permitting, of course). This is useful for testing purposes, and may
+even be useful as a temporary substitute for something like ftp. When
+run this way, however, the server will only have the privileges of the
+user who ran it.
+<p><br>To ensure that the server is run as a daemon whenever the machine is
+started, and to ensure that it runs as root so that it can serve
+multiple clients, you will need to modify the system startup
+files. Wherever appropriate (for example, in /etc/rc), insert the
+following line, substituting port number, log file location,
+configuration file location and debug level as desired:
+<p><br><code>/usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D -l /var/adm/smblogs/log -s /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</code>
+<p><br>(The above should appear in your initialisation script as a single line.
+Depending on your terminal characteristics, it may not appear that way in
+this man page. If the above appears as more than one line, please treat any
+newlines or indentation as a single space or TAB character.)
+<p><br>If the options used at compile time are appropriate for your system,
+all parameters except the desired debug level and <a href="smbd.8.html#minusD"><strong>-D</strong></a> may be
+omitted. See the section <em>OPTIONS</em> above.
+<p><br><a name="RUNNINGTHESERVERONREQUEST"></a>
+<h2>RUNNING THE SERVER ON REQUEST</h2>
+
+<p><br>If your system uses a meta-daemon such as inetd, you can arrange to
+have the smbd server started whenever a process attempts to connect to
+it. This requires several changes to the startup files on the host
+machine. If you are experimenting as an ordinary user rather than as
+root, you will need the assistance of your system administrator to
+modify the system files.
+<p><br>You will probably want to set up the NetBIOS name server <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> at
+the same time as <strong>smbd</strong>. To do this refer to the man page for
+<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd (8)</strong></a>.
+<p><br>First, ensure that a port is configured in the file /etc/services. The
+well-known port 139 should be used if possible, though any port may be
+used.
+<p><br>Ensure that a line similar to the following is in /etc/services:
+<p><br><code>netbios-ssn 139/tcp</code>
+<p><br>Note for NIS/YP users - you may need to rebuild the NIS service maps
+rather than alter your local /etc/services file.
+<p><br>Next, put a suitable line in the file /etc/inetd.conf (in the unlikely
+event that you are using a meta-daemon other than inetd, you are on
+your own). Note that the first item in this line matches the service
+name in /etc/services. Substitute appropriate values for your system
+in this line (see <strong>inetd (8)</strong>):
+<p><br><code>netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -d1 -l/var/adm/smblogs/log -s/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</code>
+<p><br>(The above should appear in /etc/inetd.conf as a single
+line. Depending on your terminal characteristics, it may not appear
+that way in this man page. If the above appears as more than one
+line, please treat any newlines or indentation as a single space or
+TAB character.)
+<p><br>Note that there is no need to specify a port number here, even if you
+are using a non-standard port number.
+<p><br>Lastly, edit the configuration file to provide suitable services. To
+start with, the following two services should be all you need:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+
+[homes]
+ writable = yes
+
+[printers]
+ writable = no
+ printable = yes
+ path = /tmp
+ public = yes
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>This will allow you to connect to your home directory and print to any
+printer supported by the host (user privileges permitting).
+<p><br><a name="TESTINGTHEINSTALLATION"></a>
+<h2>TESTING THE INSTALLATION</h2>
+
+<p><br>If running the server as a daemon, execute it before proceeding. If
+using a meta-daemon, either restart the system or kill and restart the
+meta-daemon. Some versions of inetd will reread their configuration
+tables if they receive a HUP signal.
+<p><br>If your machine's name is "fred" and your name is "mary", you should
+now be able to connect to the service <code>\\fred\mary</code>.
+<p><br>To properly test and experiment with the server, we recommend using
+the smbclient program (see <strong>smbclient (1)</strong>) and also going through
+the steps outlined in the file <em>DIAGNOSIS.txt</em> in the <em>docs/</em>
+directory of your Samba installation.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="DIAGNOSTICS"></a>
+<h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log
+file. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be
+overridden on the command line.
+<p><br>The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug
+level used by the server. If you have problems, set the debug level to
+3 and peruse the log files.
+<p><br>Most messages are reasonably self-explanatory. Unfortunately, at time
+of creation of this man page there are too many diagnostics available
+in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic. At
+this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect
+the conditions that gave rise to the diagnostics you are seeing.
+<p><br><a name="SIGNALS"></a>
+<h2>SIGNALS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Sending the smbd a SIGHUP will cause it to re-load its smb.conf
+configuration file within a short period of time.
+<p><br>To shut down a users smbd process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9)
+<em>NOT</em> be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the shared
+memory area in an inconsistant state. The safe way to terminate an
+smbd is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on
+its own.
+<p><br>The debug log level of smbd may be raised
+by sending it a SIGUSR1 <code>(kill -USR1 &lt;smbd-pid&gt;)</code> and lowered by
+sending it a SIGUSR2 <code>(kill -USR2 &lt;smbd-pid&gt;)</code>. This is to allow
+transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally
+low log level.
+<p><br>Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, they are not
+re-entrant in smbd. This you should wait until smbd is in a state of
+waiting for an incoming smb before issuing them. It is possible to
+make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the
+select call and re-blocking them after, however this would affect
+performance.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>hosts_access (5)</strong>, <strong>inetd (8)</strong>, <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd (8)</strong></a>,
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>, <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient
+(1)</strong></a>, <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm (1)</strong></a>,
+<a href="testprns.1.html"><strong>testprns (1)</strong></a>, and the Internet RFC's
+<strong>rfc1001.txt</strong>, <strong>rfc1002.txt</strong>. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB)
+specification is available as a link from the Web page :
+<a href="http://samba.anu.edu.au/cifs/">http://samba.anu.edu.au/cifs/</a>.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell (samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au). Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full list of contributors
+and details on how to submit bug reports, comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..35649e689b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbpasswd</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbpasswd</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbpasswd - The Samba encrypted password file
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br>smbpasswd is the <strong>Samba</strong> encrypted password file.
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This file is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br>smbpasswd is the <strong>Samba</strong> encrypted password file. It contains
+the username, unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the
+user, as well as account flag information and the time the password
+was last changed. This file format has been evolving with Samba
+and has had several different formats in the past.
+<p><br><a name="FILEFORMAT"></a>
+<h2>FILE FORMAT</h2>
+
+<p><br>The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.0 is very similar to
+the familiar unix <strong>passwd (5)</strong> file. It is an ASCII file containing
+one line for each user. Each field within each line is separated from
+the next by a colon. Any entry beginning with # is ignored. The
+smbpasswd file contains the following information for each user:
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="name"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>name</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>This is the user name. It must be a name that already exists
+ in the standard UNIX passwd file.
+<p><br><a name="uid"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>uid</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>This is the UNIX uid. It must match the uid field for the same
+ user entry in the standard UNIX passwd file.
+<p><br><a name="LanmanPasswordHash"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>Lanman Password Hash</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>This is the <em>LANMAN</em> hash of the users password, encoded as 32 hex
+ digits. The <em>LANMAN</em> hash is created by DES encrypting a well known
+ string with the users password as the DES key. This is the same
+ password used by Windows 95/98 machines. Note that this password hash
+ is regarded as weak as it is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and if
+ two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (ie.
+ the password is not <em>"salted"</em> as the UNIX password is). If the
+ user has a null password this field will contain the characters
+ <code>"NO PASSWORD"</code> as the start of the hex string. If the hex string
+ is equal to 32 <code>'X'</code> characters then the users account is marked as
+ <em>disabled</em> and the user will not be able to log onto the Samba
+ server.
+<p><br><em>WARNING !!</em>. Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the
+ SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this
+ password hash will be able to impersonate the user of the network.
+ For this reason these hashes are known as <em>"plain text equivalent"</em>
+ and must <em>NOT</em> be made available to anyone but the root user. To
+ protect these passwords the <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file is placed in a
+ directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the
+ <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file itself must be set to be read/write only by root,
+ with no other access.
+<p><br><a name="NTPasswordHash"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>NT Password Hash</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>This is the <em>Windows NT</em> hash of the users password, encoded as 32
+ hex digits. The <em>Windows NT</em> hash is created by taking the users
+ password as represented in 16-bit, little-endian UNICODE and then
+ applying the <em>MD4</em> (internet rfc1321) hashing algorithm to it.
+<p><br>This password hash is considered more secure than the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html#LanmanPasswordHash"><strong>Lanman
+ Password Hash</strong></a> as it preserves the case of the
+ password and uses a much higher quality hashing algorithm. However, it
+ is still the case that if two users choose the same password this
+ entry will be identical (ie. the password is not <em>"salted"</em> as the
+ UNIX password is).
+<p><br><em>WARNING !!</em>. Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the
+ SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this
+ password hash will be able to impersonate the user of the network.
+ For this reason these hashes are known as <em>"plain text equivalent"</em>
+ and must <em>NOT</em> be made available to anyone but the root user. To
+ protect these passwords the <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file is placed in a
+ directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the
+ <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file itself must be set to be read/write only by root,
+ with no other access.
+<p><br><a name="AccountFlags"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>Account Flags</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>This section contains flags that describe the attributes of the users
+ account. In the <strong>Samba2.0</strong> release this field is bracketed by <code>'['</code>
+ and <code>']'</code> characters and is always 13 characters in length (including
+ the <code>'['</code> and <code>']'</code> characters). The contents of this field may be
+ any of the characters.
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="capU"></a>
+ <li > <strong>'U'</strong> This means this is a <em>"User"</em> account, ie. an ordinary
+ user. Only <strong>User</strong> and <a href="smbpasswd.5.html#capW"><strong>Worskstation Trust</strong></a> accounts are
+ currently supported in the <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file.
+<p><br><a name="capN"></a>
+ <li > <strong>'N'</strong> This means the account has <em>no</em> password (the passwords
+ in the fields <a href="smbpasswd.5.html#LanmanPasswordHash"><strong>Lanman Password Hash</strong></a> and
+ <a href="smbpasswd.5.html#NTPasswordHash"><strong>NT Password Hash</strong></a> are ignored). Note that this
+ will only allow users to log on with no password if the
+ <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nullpasswords"><strong>null passwords</strong></a> parameter is set
+ in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> config file.
+<p><br><a name="capD"></a>
+ <li > <strong>'D'</strong> This means the account is diabled and no SMB/CIFS logins
+ will be allowed for this user.
+<p><br><a name="capW"></a>
+ <li > <strong>'W'</strong> This means this account is a <em>"Workstation Trust"</em> account.
+ This kind of account is used in the Samba PDC code stream to allow Windows
+ NT Workstations and Servers to join a Domain hosted by a Samba PDC.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future. The rest of
+ this field space is filled in with spaces.
+<p><br><a name="LastChangeTime"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>Last Change Time</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>This field consists of the time the account was last modified. It consists of
+ the characters <code>LCT-</code> (standing for <em>"Last Change Time"</em>) followed by a numeric
+ encoding of the UNIX time in seconds since the epoch (1970) that the last change
+ was made.
+<p><br><li><strong><strong>Following fields</strong></strong> <br> <br>
+<p><br>All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="NOTES"></a>
+<h2>NOTES</h2>
+
+<p><br>In previous versions of Samba (notably the 1.9.18 series) this file
+did not contain the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html#AccountFlags"><strong>Account Flags</strong></a> or
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html#LastChangeTime"><strong>Last Change Time</strong></a> fields. The Samba 2.0
+code will read and write these older password files but will not be able to
+modify the old entries to add the new fields. New entries added with
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a> will contain the new fields
+in the added accounts however. Thus an older <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file used
+with Samba 2.0 may end up with some accounts containing the new fields
+and some not.
+<p><br>In order to convert from an old-style <strong>smbpasswd</strong> file to a new
+style, run the script <strong>convert_smbpasswd</strong>, installed in the
+Samba <code>bin/</code> directory (the same place that the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+and <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> binaries are installed) as follows:
+<p><br><pre>
+
+
+ cat old_smbpasswd_file | convert_smbpasswd &gt; new_smbpasswd_file
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<p><br>The <strong>convert_smbpasswd</strong> script reads from stdin and writes to stdout
+so as not to overwrite any files by accident.
+<p><br>Once this script has been run, check the contents of the new smbpasswd
+file to ensure that it has not been damaged by the conversion script
+(which uses <strong>awk</strong>), and then replace the <code>&lt;old smbpasswd file&gt;</code>
+with the <code>&lt;new smbpasswd file&gt;</code>.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba
+(7)</strong></a>, and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4
+algorithm.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell (samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au). Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b93fbd595f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbpasswd</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbpasswd</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbpasswd - change a users SMB password
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smbpasswd</strong> [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusa">-a</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusd">-d</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minuse">-e</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusD">-D debug level</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusn">-n</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr">-r remote_machine</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusR">-R name resolve order</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusm">-m</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusj">-j DOMAIN</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusU">-U username</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minush">-h</a>] [<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minuss">-s</a>] <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#username">username</a>
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br>The <strong>smbpasswd</strong> program has several different functions, depending
+on whether it is run by the <em>root</em> user or not. When run as a normal
+user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB
+sessions on any machines that store SMB passwords.
+<p><br>By default (when run with no arguments) it will attempt to change the
+current users SMB password on the local machine. This is similar to
+the way the <strong>passwd (1)</strong> program works. <strong>smbpasswd</strong> differs from
+the <strong>passwd</strong> program works however in that it is not <em>setuid root</em>
+but works in a client-server mode and communicates with a locally
+running <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>. As a consequence in order for this
+to succeed the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> daemon must be running on
+the local machine. On a UNIX machine the encrypted SMB passwords are
+usually stored in the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a> file.
+<p><br>When run by an ordinary user with no options. <strong>smbpasswd</strong> will
+prompt them for their old smb password and then ask them for their new
+password twice, to ensure that the new password was typed
+correctly. No passwords will be echoed on the screen whilst being
+typed. If you have a blank smb password (specified by the string "NO
+PASSWORD" in the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file) then just
+press the &lt;Enter&gt; key when asked for your old password.
+<p><br><strong>smbpasswd</strong> also can be used by a normal user to change their SMB
+password on remote machines, such as Windows NT Primary Domain
+Controllers. See the <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr">(<strong>-r</strong>)</a> and
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusU"><strong>-U</strong></a> options below.
+<p><br>When run by root, <strong>smbpasswd</strong> allows new users to be added and
+deleted in the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file, as well as
+changes to the attributes of the user in this file to be made. When
+run by root, <strong>smbpasswd</strong> accesses the local
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file directly, thus enabling
+changes to be made even if <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> is not running.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="minusa"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-a</strong></strong> This option specifies that the username following should
+be added to the local <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file, with
+the new password typed (type &lt;Enter&gt; for the old password). This
+option is ignored if the username following already exists in the
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file and it is treated like a
+regular change password command. Note that the user to be added .B
+must already exist in the system password file (usually /etc/passwd)
+else the request to add the user will fail.
+<p><br>This option is only available when running <strong>smbpasswd</strong> as
+root.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d</strong></strong> This option specifies that the username following should be
+<em>disabled</em> in the local <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file.
+This is done by writing a <em>'D'</em> flag into the account control space
+in the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file. Once this is done
+all attempts to authenticate via SMB using this username will fail.
+<p><br>If the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file is in the 'old'
+format (pre-Samba 2.0 format) there is no space in the users password
+entry to write this information and so the user is disabled by writing
+'X' characters into the password space in the
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file. See <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd
+(5)</strong></a> for details on the 'old' and new password file
+formats.
+<p><br>This option is only available when running <strong>smbpasswd</strong> as root.
+<p><br><a name="minuse"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-e</strong></strong> This option specifies that the username following should be
+<em>enabled</em> in the local <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file,
+if the account was previously disabled. If the account was not
+disabled this option has no effect. Once the account is enabled
+then the user will be able to authenticate via SMB once again.
+<p><br>If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format then <strong>smbpasswd</strong> will
+prompt for a new password for this user, otherwise the account will be
+enabled by removing the <em>'D'</em> flag from account control space in the
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file. See <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd
+(5)</strong></a> for details on the 'old' and new password file
+formats.
+<p><br>This option is only available when running <strong>smbpasswd</strong> as root.
+<p><br><a name="minusD"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-D debuglevel</strong></strong> debuglevel is an integer from 0
+to 10. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero.
+<p><br>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files
+about the activities of smbpasswd. At level 0, only critical errors
+and serious warnings will be logged.
+<p><br>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and
+should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are
+designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
+<p><br><a name="minusn"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-n</strong></strong> This option specifies that the username following should
+have their password set to null (i.e. a blank password) in the local
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file. This is done by writing the
+string "NO PASSWORD" as the first part of the first password stored in
+the <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file.
+<p><br>Note that to allow users to logon to a Samba server once the password
+has been set to "NO PASSWORD" in the
+<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file the administrator must set
+the following parameter in the [global] section of the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file :
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html#nullpasswords">null passwords = true</a>
+<p><br>This option is only available when running <strong>smbpasswd</strong> as root.
+<p><br><a name="minusr"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-r remote machine name</strong></strong> This option allows a
+user to specify what machine they wish to change their password
+on. Without this parameter <strong>smbpasswd</strong> defaults to the local
+host. The <em>"remote machine name"</em> is the NetBIOS name of the
+SMB/CIFS server to contact to attempt the password change. This name
+is resolved into an IP address using the standard name resolution
+mechanism in all programs of the <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>Samba</strong></a>
+suite. See the <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusR"><strong>-R name resolve order</strong></a> parameter for details on changing this resolving
+mechanism.
+<p><br>The username whose password is changed is that of the current UNIX
+logged on user. See the <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusU"><strong>-U username</strong></a>
+parameter for details on changing the password for a different
+username.
+<p><br>Note that if changing a Windows NT Domain password the remote machine
+specified must be the Primary Domain Controller for the domain (Backup
+Domain Controllers only have a read-only copy of the user account
+database and will not allow the password change).
+<p><br><a name="minusR"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-R name resolve order</strong></strong> This option allows the user of
+smbclient to determine what name resolution services to use when
+looking up the NetBIOS name of the host being connected to.
+<p><br>The options are :<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#lmhosts">"lmhosts"</a>, <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#host">"host"</a>,
+<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#wins">"wins"</a> and <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#bcast">"bcast"</a>. They cause names to be
+resolved as follows :
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="lmhosts"></a>
+<li > <strong>lmhosts</strong> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file.
+<p><br><a name="host"></a>
+<li > <strong>host</strong> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution,
+using the system /etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name
+resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or
+Solaris this may be controlled by the <em>/etc/nsswitch.conf</em> file).
+<p><br><a name="wins"></a>
+<li > <strong>wins</strong> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsserver"><strong>wins
+server</strong></a> parameter in the smb.conf file. If
+no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored.
+<p><br><a name="bcast"></a>
+<li > <strong>bcast</strong> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
+listed in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a> parameter
+in the smb.conf file. This is the least reliable of the name resolution
+methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected
+subnet.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br>If this parameter is not set then the name resolver order defined
+in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>name resolve order</strong></a>
+will be used.
+<p><br>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast and without this
+parameter or any entry in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a>
+file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order.
+<p><br><a name="minusm"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-m</strong></strong> This option tells <strong>smbpasswd</strong> that the account being
+changed is a <em>MACHINE</em> account. Currently this is used when Samba is
+being used as an NT Primary Domain Controller. PDC support is not a
+supported feature in Samba2.0 but will become supported in a later
+release. If you wish to know more about using Samba as an NT PDC then
+please subscribe to the mailing list
+<a href="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-ntdom@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>This option is only available when running <strong>smbpasswd</strong> as root.
+<p><br><a name="minusj"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-j DOMAIN</strong></strong> This option is used to add a Samba server into a
+Windows NT Domain, as a Domain member capable of authenticating user
+accounts to any Domain Controller in the same way as a Windows NT
+Server. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security=domain</strong></a>
+option in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a> man page.
+<p><br>In order to be used in this way, the Administrator for the Windows
+NT Domain must have used the program <em>"Server Manager for Domains"</em>
+to add the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname">primary NetBIOS name</a> of
+the Samba server as a member of the Domain.
+<p><br>After this has been done, to join the Domain invoke <strong>smbpasswd</strong> with
+this parameter. <strong>smbpasswd</strong> will then look up the Primary Domain
+Controller for the Domain (found in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file in the parameter
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password server</strong></a> and change
+the machine account password used to create the secure Domain
+communication. This password is then stored by <strong>smbpasswd</strong> in a
+file, read only by root, called <code>&lt;Domain&gt;.&lt;Machine&gt;.mac</code> where
+<code>&lt;Domain&gt;</code> is the name of the Domain we are joining and tt&lt;Machine&gt;
+is the primary NetBIOS name of the machine we are running on.
+<p><br>Once this operation has been performed the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file may be updated to set the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security=domain</strong></a> option and all
+future logins to the Samba server will be authenticated to the Windows
+NT PDC.
+<p><br>Note that even though the authentication is being done to the PDC all
+users accessing the Samba server must still have a valid UNIX account
+on that machine.
+<p><br>This option is only available when running <strong>smbpasswd</strong> as root.
+<p><br><a name="minusU"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-U username</strong></strong> This option may only be used in
+conjunction with the <a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr"><strong>-r</strong></a>
+option. When changing a password on a remote machine it allows the
+user to specify the user name on that machine whose password will be
+changed. It is present to allow users who have different user names on
+different systems to change these passwords.
+<p><br><a name="minush"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-h</strong></strong> This option prints the help string for <strong>smbpasswd</strong>,
+selecting the correct one for running as root or as an ordinary user.
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s</strong></strong> This option causes <strong>smbpasswd</strong> to be silent (ie. not
+issue prompts) and to read it's old and new passwords from standard
+input, rather than from <code>/dev/tty</code> (like the <strong>passwd (1)</strong> program
+does). This option is to aid people writing scripts to drive <strong>smbpasswd</strong>
+<p><br><a name="username"></a>
+dir(<strong>username</strong>) This specifies the username for all of the <em>root
+only</em> options to operate on. Only root can specify this parameter as
+only root has the permission needed to modify attributes directly
+in the local <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file.
+<p><br><a name="NOTES"></a>
+<h2>NOTES</h2>
+
+<p><br>As <strong>smbpasswd</strong> works in client-server mode communicating with a
+local <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> for a non-root user then the <strong>smbd</strong>
+daemon must be running for this to work. A common problem is to add a
+restriction to the hosts that may access the <strong>smbd</strong> running on the
+local machine by specifying a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>"allow
+hosts"</strong></a> or <a href="smb.conf.5.html#denyhosts"><strong>"deny
+hosts"</strong></a> entry in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file and neglecting to allow
+<em>"localhost"</em> access to the <strong>smbd</strong>.
+<p><br>In addition, the <strong>smbpasswd</strong> command is only useful if <strong>Samba</strong> has
+been set up to use encrypted passwords. See the file <strong>ENCRYPTION.txt</strong>
+in the docs directory for details on how to do this.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbrun.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbrun.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b33edd4d87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbrun.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbrun</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbrun</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbrun - interface program between smbd and external programs
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smbrun</strong> <a href="smbrun.1.html#shellcommand">shell-command</a>
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>smbrun</strong> is a very small 'glue' program, which runs shell commands
+for the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> daemon <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd
+(8)</strong></a>.
+<p><br>It first changes to the highest effective user and group ID that it
+can, then runs the command line provided using the system() call. This
+program is necessary to allow some operating systems to run external
+programs as non-root.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="shellcommand"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>shell-command</strong></strong> The shell command to execute. The command
+should have a fully-qualified path.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES"></a>
+<h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2>
+
+<p><br>The <em>PATH</em> variable set for the environment in which <strong>smbrun</strong> is
+executed will affect what executables are located and executed if a
+fully-qualified path is not given in the command.
+<p><br><a name="DIAGNOSTICS"></a>
+<h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2>
+
+<p><br>If <strong>smbrun</strong> cannot be located or cannot be executed by
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> then appropriate messages will be found in
+the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> logs. Other diagnostics are dependent
+on the shell-command being run. It is advisable for your shell
+commands to issue suitable diagnostics to aid trouble-shooting.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..102114d2b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbstatus</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbstatus</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbstatus - report on current Samba connections
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smbstatus</strong> [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minusb">-b</a>] [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minusd">-d</a>] [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minusL">-L</a>] [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minusp">-p</a>] [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minusS">-S</a>] [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minuss">-s configuration file</a>] [<a href="smbstatus.1.html#minusu">-u username</a>]
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>smbstatus</strong> is a very simple program to list the current Samba
+connections.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="minusb"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-b</strong></strong> gives brief output.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d</strong></strong> gives verbose output.
+<p><br><a name="minusL"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-L</strong></strong> causes smbstatus to only list locks.
+<p><br><a name="minusp"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-p</strong></strong> print a list of <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+processes and exit. Useful for scripting.
+<p><br><a name="minusS"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-S</strong></strong> causes smbstatus to only list shares.
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s configuration file</strong></strong> The default configuration file name is
+determined at compile time. The file specified contains the
+configuration details required by the server. See <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a> for more information.
+<p><br><a name="minusu"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-u username</strong></strong> selects information relevant to <em>username</em>
+only.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..72698b96d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>smbtar</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>smbtar</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ smbtar - shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>smbtar</strong> <a href="smbtar.1.html#minuss">-s server</a> [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusp">-p password</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusx">-x service</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusX">-X</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusd">-d directory</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusu">-u user</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minust">-t tape</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusb">-b blocksize</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusN">-N filename</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusi">-i</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusr">-r</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusl">-l log level</a>] [<a href="smbtar.1.html#minusv">-v</a>] filenames
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>smbtar</strong> is a very small shell script on top of
+<a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a> which dumps SMB shares directly
+to tape.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="minuss"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-s server</strong></strong> The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides upon.
+<p><br><a name="minusx"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-x service</strong></strong> The share name on the server to connect
+to. The default is <code>backup</code>.
+<p><br><a name="minusX"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-X</strong></strong> Exclude mode. Exclude filenames... from tar create or
+restore.
+<p><br><a name="minusd"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-d directory</strong></strong> Change to initial <em>directory</em> before restoring
+/ backing up files.
+<p><br><a name="minusv"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-v</strong></strong> Verbose mode.
+<p><br><a name="minusp"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-p password</strong></strong> The password to use to access a share. Default:
+none
+<p><br><a name="minusu"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-u user</strong></strong> The user id to connect as. Default: UNIX login name.
+<p><br><a name="minust"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-t tape</strong></strong> Tape device. May be regular file or tape
+device. Default: <em>TAPE</em> environmental variable; if not set, a file
+called <code>tar.out</code>.
+<p><br><a name="minusb"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-b blocksize</strong></strong> Blocking factor. Defaults to 20. See <strong>tar (1)</strong>
+for a fuller explanation.
+<p><br><a name="minusN"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-N filename</strong></strong> Backup only files newer than filename. Could be
+used (for example) on a log file to implement incremental backups.
+<p><br><a name="minusi"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-i</strong></strong> Incremental mode; tar files are only backed up if they
+have the archive bit set. The archive bit is reset after each file is
+read.
+<p><br><a name="minusr"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-r</strong></strong> Restore. Files are restored to the share from the tar
+file.
+<p><br><a name="minusl"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>-l log level</strong></strong> Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the
+<a href="smbclient.1.html#minusd"><strong>-d</strong></a> flag of <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient
+(1)</strong></a>.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES"></a>
+<h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2>
+
+<p><br>The TAPE variable specifies the default tape device to write to. May
+be overridden with the <a href="smbtar.1.html#minust"><strong>-t</strong></a> option.
+<p><br><a name="BUGS"></a>
+<h2>BUGS</h2>
+
+<p><br>The <strong>smbtar</strong> script has different options from ordinary tar and tar
+called from <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="CAVEATS"></a>
+<h2>CAVEATS</h2>
+
+<p><br>Sites that are more careful about security may not like the way the
+script handles PC passwords. Backup and restore work on entire shares,
+should work on file lists. <strong>smbtar</strong> works best with GNU tar and may
+not work well with other versions.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient (1)</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf
+(5)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="DIAGNOSTICS"></a>
+<h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2>
+
+<p><br>See the <a href="smbclient.1.html#DIAGNOSTICS"><strong>DIAGNOSTICS</strong></a> section for
+the <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a> command.
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>Ricky Poulten <a href="mailto:poultenr@logica.co.uk"><em>poultenr@logica.co.uk</em></a> wrote the tar extension and
+this man page. The <strong>smbtar</strong> script was heavily rewritten and
+improved by Martin Kraemer <a href="mailto:Martin.Kraemer@mch.sni.de"><em>Martin.Kraemer@mch.sni.de</em></a>. Many
+thanks to everyone who suggested extensions, improvements, bug fixes,
+etc. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another
+excellent piece of Open Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0
+release by Jeremy Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+<p><br></body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7cf4bb650a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>testparm</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>testparm</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ testparm - check an smb.conf configuration file for internal correctness
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>testparm</strong> [<a href="testparm.1.html#configfilename">configfilename</a> [<a href="testparm.1.html#hostname">hostname</a> <a href="testparm.1.html#hostIP">hostIP</a>] ]
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>testparm</strong> is a very simple test program to check an
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> configuration file for internal
+correctness. If this program reports no problems, you can use the
+configuration file with confidence that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>
+will successfully load the configuration file.
+<p><br>Note that this is <em>NOT</em> a guarantee that the services specified in the
+configuration file will be available or will operate as expected.
+<p><br>If the optional host name and host IP address are specified on the
+command line, this test program will run through the service entries
+reporting whether the specified host has access to each service.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="configfilename"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>configfilename</strong></strong> This is the name of the configuration file to
+check. If this parameter is not present then the default
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file will be checked.
+<p><br><a name="hostname"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hostname</strong></strong> If this parameter and the following are specified,
+then testparm will examine the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>"hosts
+allow"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsdeny"><strong>"hosts
+deny"</strong></a> parameters in the
+<a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a> file to determine if the hostname
+with this IP address would be allowed acces to the
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> server. If this parameter is supplied, the
+hostIP parameter must also be supplied.
+<p><br><a name="hostIP"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>hostIP</strong></strong> This is the IP address of the host specified in the
+previous parameter. This address must be supplied if the hostname
+parameter is supplied.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="FILES"></a>
+<h2>FILES</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf</strong></a>. This is usually the name of the
+configuration file used by <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>.
+<p><br><a name="DIAGNOSTICS"></a>
+<h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2>
+
+<p><br>The program will issue a message saying whether the configuration file
+loaded OK or not. This message may be preceded by errors and warnings
+if the file did not load. If the file was loaded OK, the program then
+dumps all known service details to stdout.
+<p><br><a name="VERSION"></a>
+<h2>VERSION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><a href="smb.conf.5.html"><strong>smb.conf (5)</strong></a>, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a457aa55f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+<html><head><title>testparm</title>
+
+<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au">
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h1>testparm</h1>
+<h2>Samba</h2>
+<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2>
+
+
+
+
+<p><br><a name="NAME"></a>
+<h2>NAME</h2>
+ testparm - check printer name for validity with smbd
+<p><br><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a>
+<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>testprns</strong> <a href="testprns.1.html#printername">printername</a> [<a href="testprns.1.html#printcapname">printcapname</a>]
+<p><br><a name="DESCRIPTION"></a>
+<h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+<p><br>This program is part of the <strong>Samba</strong> suite.
+<p><br><strong>testprns</strong> is a very simple test program to determine whether a
+given printer name is valid for use in a service to be provided by
+<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>.
+<p><br>"Valid" in this context means "can be found in the printcap
+specified". This program is very stupid - so stupid in fact that it
+would be wisest to always specify the printcap file to use.
+<p><br><a name="OPTIONS"></a>
+<h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+<p><br><ul>
+<p><br><a name="printername"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printername</strong></strong> The printer name to validate.
+<p><br>Printer names are taken from the first field in each record in the
+printcap file, single printer names and sets of aliases separated by
+vertical bars ("|") are recognised. Note that no validation or
+checking of the printcap syntax is done beyond that required to
+extract the printer name. It may be that the print spooling system is
+more forgiving or less forgiving than <strong>testprns</strong>. However, if
+<strong>testprns</strong> finds the printer then <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> should
+do so as well.
+<p><br><a name="printcapname"></a>
+<li><strong><strong>printcapname</strong></strong> This is the name of the printcap file within
+which to search for the given printer name.
+<p><br>If no printcap name is specified <strong>testprns</strong> will attempt to scan the
+printcap file name specified at compile time.
+<p><br></ul>
+<p><br><a name="FILES"></a>
+<h2>FILES</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>/etc/printcap</strong> This is usually the default printcap file to
+scan. See <strong>printcap (5)</strong>.
+<p><br><a name="DIAGNOSTICS"></a>
+<h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2>
+
+<p><br>If a printer is found to be valid, the message "Printer name
+&lt;printername&gt; is valid" will be displayed.
+<p><br>If a printer is found to be invalid, the message "Printer name
+&lt;printername&gt; is not valid" will be displayed.
+<p><br>All messages that would normally be logged during operation of the
+<a href="samba.7.html"><strong>Samba</strong></a> daemons are logged by this program to the
+file <code>test.log</code> in the current directory. The program runs at
+debuglevel 3, so quite extensive logging information is written. The
+log should be checked carefully for errors and warnings.
+<p><br>Other messages are self-explanatory.
+<p><br><a name="SEEALSO"></a>
+<h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+<p><br><strong>printcap (5)</strong>, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient
+(1)</strong></a>
+<p><br><a name="AUTHOR"></a>
+<h2>AUTHOR</h2>
+
+<p><br>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
+Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the
+Linux kernel is developed.
+<p><br>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
+sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
+Source software) and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy
+Allison, <a href="mailto:samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au"><em>samba-bugs@samba.anu.edu.au</em></a>.
+<p><br>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full
+list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports,
+comments etc.
+</body>
+</html>